










                         SENDMAILTM

              INSTALLATION AND OPERATION GUIDE

                        Eric Allman
                       Claus Assmann
                    Gregory Neil Shapiro
                      Proofpoint, Inc.

                       Version 8.759

                 For Sendmail Version 8.15




     SendmailTM implements a  general  purpose  internetwork
mail  routing  facility  under the UNIX(R) operating system.
It is not tied to any one transport protocol -- its function
may  be likened to a crossbar switch, relaying messages from
one domain into another.  In the process, it can do  a  lim-
ited  amount  of  message  header editing to put the message
into a format that is appropriate for the receiving  domain.
All  of  this  is  done under the control of a configuration
file.

     Due to the requirements of  flexibility  for  sendmail,
the  configuration  file  can  seem somewhat unapproachable.
However, there are only a few basic configurations for  most
sites, for which standard configuration files have been sup-
plied.  Most other configurations can be built by  adjusting
an existing configuration file incrementally.

     Sendmail  is  based  on  RFC 821 (Simple Mail Transport
Protocol), RFC 822 (Internet Mail Headers Format),  RFC  974
(MX  routing),  RFC  1123  (Internet Host Requirements), RFC
1413 (Identification server), RFC 1652 (SMTP 8BITMIME Exten-
sion),  RFC  1869  (SMTP Service Extensions), RFC 1870 (SMTP
SIZE Extension), RFC 1891 (SMTP  Delivery  Status  Notifica-
tions), RFC 1892 (Multipart/Report), RFC 1893 (Enhanced Mail
System Status Codes), RFC 1894  (Delivery  Status  Notifica-
tions),  RFC 1985 (SMTP Service Extension for Remote Message
Queue  Starting),  RFC  2033  (Local  Message   Transmission
____________________
   DISCLAIMER: This documentation is under modification.
   Sendmail  is  a  trademark of Proofpoint, Inc.  US Patent
Numbers 6865671, 6986037.




Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide           SMM:08-1







SMM:08-2           Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


Protocol),  RFC  2034  (SMTP Service Extension for Returning
Enhanced Error Codes), RFC 2045 (MIME),  RFC  2476  (Message
Submission),  RFC  2487  (SMTP  Service Extension for Secure
SMTP over TLS), RFC 2554 (SMTP Service Extension for Authen-
tication),  RFC  2821  (Simple  Mail Transfer Protocol), RFC
2822 (Internet Message Format), RFC 2852  (Deliver  By  SMTP
Service Extension), and RFC 2920 (SMTP Service Extension for
Command Pipelining).  However, since sendmail is designed to
work in a wider world, in many cases it can be configured to
exceed these protocols.  These cases are described herein.

     Although sendmail is intended to run without  the  need
for monitoring, it has a number of features that may be used
to monitor or adjust the  operation  under  unusual  circum-
stances.  These features are described.

     Section  one  describes  how  to  do  a  basic sendmail
installation.  Section two explains the day-to-day  informa-
tion  you  should know to maintain your mail system.  If you
have a relatively normal site,  these  two  sections  should
contain  sufficient  information for you to install sendmail
and keep it happy.  Section three has information  regarding
the  command  line  arguments.   Section four describes some
parameters that may be safely tweaked.   Section  five  con-
tains  the  nitty-gritty information about the configuration
file.  This section is for masochists and  people  who  must
write  their  own configuration file.  Section six describes
configuration  that  can  be  done  at  compile  time.   The
appendixes give a brief but detailed explanation of a number
of features not described in the rest of the paper.

































Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide           SMM:08-7


1.  BASIC INSTALLATION

        There are two basic steps  to  installing  sendmail.
   First,  you  have  to compile and install the binary.  If
   sendmail has already been ported to your operating system
   that should be simple.  Second, you must build a run-time
   configuration file.  This is a file that  sendmail  reads
   when  it  starts  up  that describes the mailers it knows
   about, how to parse addresses, how to rewrite the message
   header,  and  the  settings of various options.  Although
   the configuration file can be quite complex, a configura-
   tion can usually be built using an M4-based configuration
   language.  Assuming you have the standard  sendmail  dis-
   tribution, see cf/README for further information.

        The  remainder  of  this  section  will describe the
   installation of sendmail assuming you can use one of  the
   existing  configurations  and that the standard installa-
   tion parameters are acceptable.  All pathnames and  exam-
   ples  are  given  from  the root of the sendmail subtree,
   normally /usr/src/usr.sbin/sendmail on 4.4BSD-based  sys-
   tems.

        Continue  with  the next section if you need/want to
   compile sendmail yourself.  If you have a running  binary
   already  on your system, you should probably skip to sec-
   tion 1.2.

   1.1.  Compiling Sendmail

           All sendmail source is in the sendmail  subdirec-
      tory.   To  compile  sendmail,  "cd" into the sendmail
      directory and type


          ./Build

      This will leave the binary in an  appropriately  named
      subdirectory, e.g., obj.BSD-OS.2.1.i386.  It works for
      multiple object versions  compiled  out  of  the  same
      directory.

      1.1.1.  Tweaking the Build Invocation

              You  can give parameters on the Build command.
         In most cases these are only used  when  the  obj.*
         directory   is  first  created.   To  restart  from
         scratch, use -c.  These commands include:

         -L libdirs
              A list of directories to search for libraries.












SMM:08-8           Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


         -I incdirs
              A list of directories to  search  for  include
              files.

         -E envar=value
              Set  an  environment  variable to an indicated
              value before compiling.

         -c   Create a new obj.*  tree before running.

         -f siteconfig
              Read the indicated  site  configuration  file.
              If  this  parameter  is  not  specified, Build
              includes   all   of    the    files    $BUILD-
              TOOLS/Site/site.$oscf.m4      and      $BUILD-
              TOOLS/Site/site.config.m4,  where  $BUILDTOOLS
              is  normally ../devtools and $oscf is the same
              name as used on  the  obj.*   directory.   See
              below for a description of the site configura-
              tion file.

         -S   Skip  auto-configuration.   Build  will  avoid
              auto-detecting  libraries if this is set.  All
              libraries and map definitions must  be  speci-
              fied in the site configuration file.

         Most  other  parameters are passed to the make pro-
         gram; for details see $BUILDTOOLS/README.

      1.1.2.  Creating a Site Configuration File

              (This section is not yet complete.   For  now,
         see  the  file  devtools/README  for details.)  See
         sendmail/README for various compilation flags  that
         can be set.

      1.1.3.  Tweaking the Makefile

              Sendmail  supports  two  different formats for
         the local (on disk) version of  databases,  notably
         the aliases database.  At least one of these should
         be defined if at all possible.

         NDBM      The  ``new  DBM''  format,  available  on
                   nearly  all  systems  around today.  This
                   was the preferred format prior to 4.4BSD.
                   It allows such complex things as multiple
                   databases and closing  a  currently  open
                   database.

         NEWDB     The  Berkeley  DB  package.   If you have
                   this, use it.  It  allows  long  records,
                   multiple  open  databases, real in-memory










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide           SMM:08-9


                   caching, and so forth.   You  can  define
                   this in conjunction with NDBM; if you do,
                   old alias databases are read, but when  a
                   new  database  is  created  it will be in
                   NEWDB format.  As a nasty  hack,  if  you
                   have NEWDB, NDBM, and NIS defined, and if
                   the alias file  name  includes  the  sub-
                   string  "/yp/", sendmail will create both
                   new and old versions of  the  alias  file
                   during   a  newalias  command.   This  is
                   required because the  Sun  NIS/YP  system
                   reads  the DBM version of the alias file.
                   It's ugly as sin, but it works.

         If neither of these are defined, sendmail reads the
         alias  file  into memory on every invocation.  This
         can be slow and should be avoided.  There are  also
         several methods for remote database access:

         LDAP      Lightweight Directory Access Protocol.

         NIS       Sun's  Network Information Services (for-
                   merly YP).

         NISPLUS   Sun's NIS+ services.

         NETINFO   NeXT's NetInfo service.

         HESIOD    Hesiod service (from Athena).

         Other compilation  flags  are  set  in  conf.h  and
         should be predefined for you unless you are porting
         to a new environment.  For more options  see  send-
         mail/README.

      1.1.4.  Compilation and installation

              After  making  the  local system configuration
         described above, You should be able to compile  and
         install the system.  The script "Build" is the best
         approach on most systems:


             ./Build

         This will use uname(1) to create a custom  Makefile
         for your environment.

              If  you are installing in the standard places,
         you should be able to install using


             ./Build install










SMM:08-10          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


         This should install the  binary  in  /usr/sbin  and
         create    links    from   /usr/bin/newaliases   and
         /usr/bin/mailq to /usr/sbin/sendmail.  On most sys-
         tems  it  will  also  format and install man pages.
         Notice: as of version 8.12 sendmail will no  longer
         be  installed  set-user-ID root by default.  If you
         really want to use the old method, you can  specify
         it as target:


             ./Build install-set-user-id


   1.2.  Configuration Files

           Sendmail  cannot  operate without a configuration
      file.  The configuration  defines  the  mail  delivery
      mechanisms  understood  at  this  site,  how to access
      them, how to forward email to remote mail systems, and
      a  number  of  tuning  parameters.  This configuration
      file is detailed in the later portion  of  this  docu-
      ment.

           The  sendmail  configuration  can  be daunting at
      first.  The world is complex, and the mail  configura-
      tion  reflects  that.   The  distribution  includes an
      m4-based configuration package that hides a lot of the
      complexity.  See cf/README for details.

           Our  configuration  files  are processed by m4 to
      facilitate local customization; the  directory  cf  of
      the   sendmail  distribution  directory  contains  the
      source files.  This directory contains several  subdi-
      rectories:

      cf        Both   site-dependent  and  site-independent
                descriptions of hosts.  These can be literal
                host  names  (e.g.,  "ucbvax.mc")  when  the
                hosts are gateways or more general  descrip-
                tions  (such  as  "generic-solaris2.mc" as a
                general  description  of  an  SMTP-connected
                host  running Solaris 2.x.  Files ending .mc
                (``M4   Configuration'')   are   the   input
                descriptions;  the  output  is in the corre-
                sponding .cf file.  The general structure of
                these files is described below.

      domain    Site-dependent    subdomain    descriptions.
                These are tied to the way your  organization
                wants   to   do  addressing.   For  example,
                domain/CS.Berkeley.EDU.m4 is our description
                for  hosts in the CS.Berkeley.EDU subdomain.
                These are referenced  using  the  DOMAIN  m4










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-11


                macro in the .mc file.

      feature   Definitions  of  specific features that some
                particular host in  your  site  might  want.
                These  are  referenced  using the FEATURE m4
                macro.  An example  feature  is  use_cw_file
                (which    tells    sendmail   to   read   an
                /etc/mail/local-host-names file  on  startup
                to find the set of local names).

      hack      Local  hacks,  referenced  using the HACK m4
                macro.  Try to avoid these.   The  point  of
                having  them  here  is to make it clear that
                they smell.

      m4        Site-independent m4(1)  include  files  that
                have information common to all configuration
                files.   This  can  be  thought  of   as   a
                "#include" directory.

      mailer    Definitions of mailers, referenced using the
                MAILER m4 macro.  The mailer types that  are
                known  in  this distribution are fax, local,
                smtp, uucp, and  usenet.   For  example,  to
                include  support for the UUCP-based mailers,
                use "MAILER(uucp)".

      ostype    Definitions  describing  various   operating
                system environments (such as the location of
                support files).  These are referenced  using
                the OSTYPE m4 macro.

      sh        Shell  files  used  by the m4 build process.
                You shouldn't have to mess with these.

      siteconfig
                Local UUCP connectivity  information.   This
                directory  has  been supplanted by the mail-
                ertable  feature;  any  new   configurations
                should  use  that  feature  to  do UUCP (and
                other) routing.  The use of  this  directory
                is deprecated.

           If you are in a new domain (e.g., a company), you
      will probably want to create a cf/domain file for your
      domain.   This consists primarily of relay definitions
      and features you want enabled site-wide: for  example,
      Berkeley's domain definition defines relays for BitNET
      and UUCP.  These are specific to Berkeley, and  should
      be   fully-qualified   internet-style   domain  names.
      Please check to make certain they are  reasonable  for
      your domain.











SMM:08-12          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


           Subdomains  at  Berkeley  are also represented in
      the cf/domain  directory.   For  example,  the  domain
      CS.Berkeley.EDU  is  the  Computer  Science subdomain,
      EECS.Berkeley.EDU is the  Electrical  Engineering  and
      Computer  Sciences  subdomain, and S2K.Berkeley.EDU is
      the Sequoia 2000 subdomain.  You will probably have to
      add  an  entry to this directory to be appropriate for
      your domain.

           You will have to use or create .mc files  in  the
      cf/cf  subdirectory  for your hosts.  This is detailed
      in the cf/README file.

   1.3.  Details of Installation Files

           This subsection describes the files that comprise
      the sendmail installation.

      1.3.1.  /usr/sbin/sendmail

              The   binary   for   sendmail  is  located  in
         /usr/sbin[1].  It should be set-group-ID  smmsp  as
         described  in sendmail/SECURITY.  For security rea-
         sons, /, /usr, and /usr/sbin  should  be  owned  by
         root, mode 0755[2].

      1.3.2.  /etc/mail/sendmail.cf

              This  is the main configuration file for send-
         mail[3].  This is one of the two  non-library  file
         names  compiled  into  sendmail[4],  the  other  is
         /etc/mail/submit.cf.
____________________
   [1]This is usually /usr/sbin on 4.4BSD and newer systems;
many  systems install it in /usr/lib.  I understand it is in
/usr/ucblib on System V Release 4.
   [2]Some  vendors  ship  them owned by bin; this creates a
security hole that is  not  actually  related  to  sendmail.
Other  important  directories  that  should have restrictive
ownerships  and  permissions  are  /bin,   /usr/bin,   /etc,
/etc/mail, /usr/etc, /lib, and /usr/lib.
   [3]Actually, the pathname varies depending on the operat-
ing system; /etc/mail is the preferred directory.  Some old-
er systems install it in /usr/lib/sendmail.cf, and I've also
seen  it in /usr/ucblib.  If you want to move this file, add
-D_PATH_SENDMAILCF=\"/file/name\" to the flags passed to the
C compiler.  Moving this file is not recommended: other pro-
grams and scripts know of this location.
   [4]The system libraries can  reference  other  files;  in
particular,  system  library subroutines that sendmail calls
probably reference /etc/passwd and /etc/resolv.conf.












Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-13


              The configuration  file  is  normally  created
         using  the  distribution files described above.  If
         you have a particularly unusual  system  configura-
         tion you may need to create a special version.  The
         format of this file is detailed in  later  sections
         of this document.

      1.3.3.  /etc/mail/submit.cf

              This  is  the  configuration file for sendmail
         when it is used for  initial  mail  submission,  in
         which case it is also called ``Mail Submission Pro-
         gram'' (MSP) in contrast to ``Mail Transfer Agent''
         (MTA).   Starting  with version 8.12, sendmail uses
         one of two different configuration files  based  on
         its  operation  mode  (or  the new -A option).  For
         initial  mail  submission,  i.e.,  if  one  of  the
         options  -bm  (default),  -bs,  or -t is specified,
         submit.cf is used (if available), for other  opera-
         tions sendmail.cf is used.  Details can be found in
         sendmail/SECURITY.  submit.cf is shipped with send-
         mail  (in  cf/cf/) and is installed by default.  If
         changes to the configuration need to be made, start
         with  cf/cf/submit.mc and follow the instruction in
         cf/README.

      1.3.4.  /usr/bin/newaliases

              The newaliases command should just be  a  link
         to sendmail:


             rm -f /usr/bin/newaliases
             ln -s /usr/sbin/sendmail /usr/bin/newaliases

         This  can  be installed in whatever search path you
         prefer for your system.

      1.3.5.  /usr/bin/hoststat

              The hoststat command should just be a link  to
         sendmail, in a fashion similar to newaliases.  This
         command lists the status of the last mail  transac-
         tion  with all remote hosts.  The -v flag will pre-
         vent the status display from being  truncated.   It
         functions  only when the HostStatusDirectory option
         is set.

      1.3.6.  /usr/bin/purgestat

              This command is also a link to  sendmail.   It
         flushes  expired  (Timeout.hoststatus)  information
         that is stored in the HostStatusDirectory tree.










SMM:08-14          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


      1.3.7.  /var/spool/mqueue

              The directory /var/spool/mqueue should be cre-
         ated to hold the mail queue.  This directory should
         be mode 0700 and owned by root.

              The actual path of this directory  is  defined
         by  the  QueueDirectory  option  of the sendmail.cf
         file.  To use multiple queues, supply a value  end-
         ing     with    an    asterisk.     For    example,
         /var/spool/mqueue/qd* will use all of the  directo-
         ries  or  symbolic  links  to directories beginning
         with `qd' in /var/spool/mqueue  as  queue  directo-
         ries.   Do not change the queue directory structure
         while sendmail is running.

              If these directories  have  subdirectories  or
         symbolic links to directories named `qf', `df', and
         `xf', then these will be  used  for  the  different
         queue  file  types.   That  is,  the data files are
         stored in the  `df'  subdirectory,  the  transcript
         files  are stored in the `xf' subdirectory, and all
         others are stored in the `qf' subdirectory.

              If shared memory support is compiled in, send-
         mail  stores  the  available  diskspace in a shared
         memory segment to make the values readily available
         to  all children without incurring system overhead.
         In this case, only the  daemon  updates  the  data;
         i.e., the sendmail daemon creates the shared memory
         segment and deletes it if it is terminated.  To use
         this, sendmail must have been compiled with support
         for shared memory (-DSM_CONF_SHM)  and  the  option
         SharedMemoryKey  must  be  set.  Notice: do not use
         the same key for sendmail invocations with  differ-
         ent queue directories or different queue group dec-
         larations.  Access to shared  memory  is  not  con-
         trolled  by  locks, i.e., there is a race condition
         when data in the shared memory  is  updated.   How-
         ever,  since operation of sendmail does not rely on
         the data in the shared memory, this does not  nega-
         tively influence the behavior.

      1.3.8.  /var/spool/clientmqueue

              The  directory  /var/spool/clientmqueue should
         be created to hold the mail queue.  This  directory
         should  be mode 0770 and owned by user smmsp, group
         smmsp.

              The actual path of this directory  is  defined
         by the QueueDirectory option of the submit.cf file.











Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-15


      1.3.9.  /var/spool/mqueue/.hoststat

              This  is a typical value for the HostStatusDi-
         rectory option, containing one file per  host  that
         this  sendmail  has  chatted  with recently.  It is
         normally a subdirectory of mqueue.

      1.3.10.  /etc/mail/aliases*

              The    system    aliases    are    held     in
         "/etc/mail/aliases".   A  sample is given in "send-
         mail/aliases" which  includes  some  aliases  which
         must be defined:


             cp sendmail/aliases /etc/mail/aliases
             edit /etc/mail/aliases

         You  should  extend this file with any aliases that
         are apropos to your system.

              Normally sendmail looks at a database  version
         of      the     files,     stored     either     in
         "/etc/mail/aliases.dir" and "/etc/mail/aliases.pag"
         or  "/etc/mail/aliases.db" depending on which data-
         base package you are using.   The  actual  path  of
         this file is defined in the AliasFile option of the
         sendmail.cf file.

              The permissions of  the  alias  file  and  the
         database  versions  should be 0640 to prevent local
         denial of service attacks as explained in  the  top
         level  README in the sendmail distribution.  If the
         permissions  0640  are  used,  be  sure  that  only
         trusted users belong to the group assigned to those
         files.  Otherwise, files should not even  be  group
         readable.

      1.3.11.  /etc/rc or /etc/init.d/sendmail

              It  will be necessary to start up the sendmail
         daemon when your system reboots.  This daemon  per-
         forms  two functions: it listens on the SMTP socket
         for connections (to receive mail from a remote sys-
         tem)  and  it  processes  the queue periodically to
         insure that mail gets delivered when hosts come up.

              If  necessary,  add  the  following  lines  to
         "/etc/rc"  (or  "/etc/rc.local"  as appropriate) in
         the area where it is starting up the daemons  on  a
         BSD-base  system,  or on a System-V-based system in
         one    of    the    startup    files,     typically
         "/etc/init.d/sendmail":










SMM:08-16          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


             if [ -f /usr/sbin/sendmail -a -f /etc/mail/sendmail.cf ]; then
                  (cd /var/spool/mqueue; rm -f xf*)
                  /usr/sbin/sendmail -bd -q30m &
                  echo -n ' sendmail' >/dev/console
             fi

         The  "cd"  and  "rm" commands insure that all tran-
         script files have been  removed;  extraneous  tran-
         script  files may be left around if the system goes
         down in the middle of processing  a  message.   The
         line  that actually invokes sendmail has two flags:
         "-bd" causes it to listen on  the  SMTP  port,  and
         "-q30m" causes it to run the queue every half hour.

              Some people use a more complex startup script,
         removing zero length qf/hf/Qf files  and  df  files
         for  which there is no qf/hf/Qf file.  Note this is
         not advisable.  For example, see Figure  1  for  an
         example  of  a complex script which does this clean
         up.

      1.3.12.  /etc/mail/helpfile

              This is the help file used by  the  SMTP  HELP
         command.   It should be copied from "sendmail/help-
         file":


             cp sendmail/helpfile /etc/mail/helpfile

         The actual path of this  file  is  defined  in  the
         HelpFile option of the sendmail.cf file.

      1.3.13.  /etc/mail/statistics

              If  you  wish to collect statistics about your
         mail  traffic,   you   should   create   the   file
         "/etc/mail/statistics":


             cp /dev/null /etc/mail/statistics
             chmod 0600 /etc/mail/statistics

         This  file  does  not grow.  It is printed with the
         program "mailstats/mailstats.c."  The  actual  path
         of  this  file  is  defined  in the S option of the
         sendmail.cf file.

      1.3.14.  /usr/bin/mailq

              If sendmail is invoked  as  "mailq,"  it  will
         simulate  the  -bp  flag (i.e., sendmail will print
         the contents of the mail queue; see  below).   This










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-17



____________________________________________________________

#!/bin/sh
# remove zero length qf/hf/Qf files
for qffile in qf* hf* Qf*
do
     if [ -r $qffile ]
     then
          if [ ! -s $qffile ]
          then
               echo -n " <zero: $qffile>" > /dev/console
               rm -f $qffile
          fi
     fi
done
# rename tf files to be qf if the qf does not exist
for tffile in tf*
do
     qffile=`echo $tffile | sed 's/t/q/'`
     if [ -r $tffile -a ! -f $qffile ]
     then
          echo -n " <recovering: $tffile>" > /dev/console
          mv $tffile $qffile
     else
          if [ -f $tffile ]
          then
               echo -n " <extra: $tffile>" > /dev/console
               rm -f $tffile
          fi
     fi
done
# remove df files with no corresponding qf/hf/Qf files
for dffile in df*
do
     qffile=`echo $dffile | sed 's/d/q/'`
     hffile=`echo $dffile | sed 's/d/h/'`
     Qffile=`echo $dffile | sed 's/d/Q/'`
     if [ -r $dffile -a ! -f $qffile -a ! -f $hffile -a ! -f $Qffile ]
     then
          echo -n " <incomplete: $dffile>" > /dev/console
          mv $dffile `echo $dffile | sed 's/d/D/'`
     fi
done
# announce files that have been saved during disaster recovery
for xffile in [A-Z]f*
do
     if [ -f $xffile ]
     then
          echo -n " <panic: $xffile>" > /dev/console
     fi
done











SMM:08-18          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


            Figure 1 -- A complex startup script
____________________________________________________________


         should be a link to /usr/sbin/sendmail.

      1.3.15.  sendmail.pid

              sendmail  stores  its  current pid in the file
         specified  by  the  PidFile  option   (default   is
         _PATH_SENDMAILPID).    sendmail  uses  TempFileMode
         (which defaults to 0600) as the permissions of that
         file  to prevent local denial of service attacks as
         explained in the top level README in  the  sendmail
         distribution.   If the file already exists, then it
         might  be  necessary  to  change  the   permissions
         accordingly, e.g.,


             chmod 0600 /var/run/sendmail.pid

         Note that as of version 8.13, this file is unlinked
         when sendmail exits.  As a result of this change, a
         script such as the following, which may have worked
         prior to 8.13, will no longer work:


             # stop & start sendmail
             PIDFILE=/var/run/sendmail.pid
             kill `head -1 $PIDFILE`
             `tail -1 $PIDFILE`

         because it assumes  that  the  pidfile  will  still
         exist  even  after  killing the process to which it
         refers.  Below is a script  which  will  work  cor-
         rectly on both newer and older versions:


             # stop & start sendmail
             PIDFILE=/var/run/sendmail.pid
             pid=`head -1 $PIDFILE`
             cmd=`tail -1 $PIDFILE`
             kill $pid
             $cmd

         This is just an example script, it does not perform
         any error checks, e.g., whether the pidfile  exists
         at all.

      1.3.16.  Map Files

              To  prevent local denial of service attacks as
         explained in the top level README in  the  sendmail










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-19


         distribution,  the permissions of map files created
         by makemap should be 0640.  The use of 0640 implies
         that   only  trusted  users  belong  to  the  group
         assigned to those files.  If  those  files  already
         exist,  then  it  might  be necessary to change the
         permissions accordingly, e.g.,


             cd /etc/mail
             chmod 0640 *.db *.pag *.dir


2.  NORMAL OPERATIONS

   2.1.  The System Log

           The system log is  supported  by  the  syslogd(8)
      program.   All messages from sendmail are logged under
      the LOG_MAIL facility[5].

      2.1.1.  Format

              Each  line  in  the  system  log consists of a
         timestamp, the name of the machine  that  generated
         it  (for  logging  from  several  machines over the
         local area network), the word  "sendmail:",  and  a
         message[6].   Most  messages  are  a  sequence   of
         name=value pairs.

              The  two  most  common lines are logged when a
         message is processed.  The first logs  the  receipt
         of  a  message;  there will be exactly one of these
         per message.  Some fields may be omitted if they do
         not contain interesting information.  Fields are:

         from      The envelope sender address.

         size      The size of the message in bytes.

         class     The  class  (i.e., numeric precedence) of
                   the message.

         pri       The initial message  priority  (used  for
                   queue sorting).


____________________
   [5]Except on Ultrix, which does not support facilities in
the syslog.
   [6]This  format  may  vary  slightly  if  your vendor has
changed the syntax.












SMM:08-20          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


         nrcpts    The  number  of  envelope  recipients for
                   this message (after aliasing and forward-
                   ing).

         msgid     The  message  id of the message (from the
                   header).

         bodytype  The message body type (7BIT or 8BITMIME),
                   as determined from the envelope.

         proto     The protocol used to receive this message
                   (e.g., ESMTP or UUCP)

         daemon    The daemon name  from  the  DaemonPortOp-
                   tions setting.

         relay     The machine from which it was received.

         There  is also one line logged per delivery attempt
         (so there can be several per message if delivery is
         deferred or there are multiple recipients).  Fields
         are:

         to        A comma-separated list of the  recipients
                   to this mailer.

         ctladdr   The  ``controlling  user'',  that is, the
                   name of the user whose credentials we use
                   for delivery.

         delay     The  total  delay  between  the time this
                   message  was  received  and  the  current
                   delivery attempt.

         xdelay    The  amount of time needed in this deliv-
                   ery attempt (normally indicative  of  the
                   speed of the connection).

         mailer    The name of the mailer used to deliver to
                   this recipient.

         relay     The  name  of  the  host  that   actually
                   accepted (or rejected) this recipient.

         dsn       The  enhanced  error  code  (RFC 2034) if
                   available.

         stat      The delivery status.

         Not all fields are present  in  all  messages;  for
         example,  the relay is usually not listed for local
         deliveries.











Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-21


      2.1.2.  Levels

              If  you  have  syslogd(8)  or  an   equivalent
         installed,  you  will be able to do logging.  There
         is a  large  amount  of  information  that  can  be
         logged.   The  log  is  arranged as a succession of
         levels.  At the lowest level only extremely strange
         situations  are logged.  At the highest level, even
         the  most  mundane  and  uninteresting  events  are
         recorded  for posterity.  As a convention, log lev-
         els under ten are  considered  generally  "useful;"
         log levels above 64 are reserved for debugging pur-
         poses.  Levels from 11-64 are reserved for  verbose
         information that some sites might want.

              A  complete  description  of the log levels is
         given in section ``Log Level''.

   2.2.  Dumping State

           You can ask sendmail to log a dump  of  the  open
      files and the connection cache by sending it a SIGUSR1
      signal.  The results are logged at LOG_DEBUG priority.

   2.3.  The Mail Queues

           Mail messages may either be delivered immediately
      or  be  held  for  later  delivery.  Held messages are
      placed into a holding directory called a mail queue.

           A mail message may be queued for these reasons:

       + If a mail message is temporarily undeliverable,  it
         is  queued and delivery is attempted later.  If the
         message is addressed to multiple recipients, it  is
         queued  only  for those recipients to whom delivery
         is not immediately possible.
       + If the SuperSafe option is set to  true,  all  mail
         messages are queued while delivery is attempted.
       + If  the DeliveryMode option is set to queue-only or
         defer, all mail is queued, and no immediate  deliv-
         ery is attempted.
       + If  the  load average becomes higher than the value
         of the  QueueLA  option  and  the  QueueFactor  (q)
         option  divided  by  the  difference in the current
         load average and the QueueLA  option  plus  one  is
         less than the priority of the message, messages are
         queued rather than immediately delivered.
       + One or more addresses are marked as  expensive  and
         delivery  is  postponed until the next queue run or
         one or more address are marked as held  via  mailer
         which uses the hold mailer flag.











SMM:08-22          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


       + The mail message has been marked as quarantined via
         a mail filter or rulesets.

      2.3.1.  Queue Groups and Queue Directories

              There are one or more mail queues.  Each  mail
         queue  belongs to a queue group.  There is always a
         default  queue  group  that  is  called  ``mqueue''
         (which  is where messages go by default unless oth-
         erwise specified).  The  directory  or  directories
         which  comprise  the default queue group are speci-
         fied by the QueueDirectory option.  There are  zero
         or  more  additional  named  queue  groups declared
         using the Q command in the configuration file.

              By default, a queued message is placed in  the
         queue  group associated with the first recipient in
         the recipient list.  A recipient address is  mapped
         to  a queue group as follows.  First, if there is a
         ruleset called ``queuegroup'', and if this  ruleset
         maps  the  address to a queue group name, then that
         queue group is chosen.  That is, the  argument  for
         the ruleset is the recipient address and the result
         should be $# followed by the name of a queue group.
         Otherwise,   if  the  mailer  associated  with  the
         address specifies a queue group,  then  that  queue
         group  is  chosen.   Otherwise,  the  default queue
         group is chosen.

              A message with  multiple  recipients  will  be
         split  if  different queue groups are chosen by the
         mapping of recipients to queue groups.

              When a message is placed in a queue group, and
         the queue group has more than one queue, a queue is
         selected randomly.

              If  a  message  with  multiple  recipients  is
         placed into a queue group with the 'r' option (max-
         imum number of recipients per  message)  set  to  a
         positive  value  N,  and  if  there are more than N
         recipients in the message, then the message will be
         split into multiple messages, each of which have at
         most N recipients.

              Notice: if multiple queue groups are used,  do
         not move queue files around, e.g., into a different
         queue directory.  This may have weird  effects  and
         can  cause  mail  not to be delivered.  Queue files
         and directories should be  treated  as  opaque  and
         should not be manipulated directly.












Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-23


      2.3.2.  Queue Runs

              sendmail has two different ways to process the
         queue(s).  The first one is to start queue  runners
         after certain intervals (``normal'' queue runners),
         the second one is to keep  queue  runner  processes
         around  (``persistent''  queue  runners).   How  to
         select either of these types is  discussed  in  the
         appendix  ``COMMAND LINE FLAGS''.  Persistent queue
         runners have the advantage that  no  new  processes
         need  to be spawned at certain intervals; they just
         sleep for a specified time after  they  finished  a
         queue  run.   Another advantage of persistent queue
         runners is that only one  process  belonging  to  a
         workgroup  (a  workgroup  is a set of queue groups)
         collects the data for a queue run and then multiple
         queue  runner  may  go ahead using that data.  This
         can significantly reduce the disk I/O necessary  to
         read  the queue files compared to starting multiple
         queue runners directly.  Their disadvantage is that
         a  new  queue  run  is only started after all queue
         runners belonging to a group finished their  tasks.
         In  case one of the queue runners tries delivery to
         a slow recipient site at the end of  a  queue  run,
         the  next  queue  run may be substantially delayed.
         In general this should be smoothed out due  to  the
         distribution of those slow jobs, however, for sites
         with small  number  of  queue  entries  this  might
         introduce noticable delays.  In general, persistent
         queue runners are only useful for  sites  with  big
         queues.

      2.3.3.  Manual Intervention

              Under normal conditions the mail queue will be
         processed transparently.   However,  you  may  find
         that  manual  intervention  is sometimes necessary.
         For example, if a major host is down for  a  period
         of  time  the  queue  may become clogged.  Although
         sendmail ought to recover gracefully when the  host
         comes up, you may find performance unacceptably bad
         in the meantime.  In that case you  want  to  check
         the  content  of  the  queue  and  manipulate it as
         explained in the next two sections.

      2.3.4.  Printing the queue

              The contents of the queue(s)  can  be  printed
         using  the  mailq command (or by specifying the -bp
         flag to sendmail):


             mailq










SMM:08-24          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


         This will produce a listing of the queue id's,  the
         size  of  the message, the date the message entered
         the queue,  and  the  sender  and  recipients.   If
         shared  memory support is compiled in, the flag -bP
         can be used to print the number of entries  in  the
         queue(s),  provided  a  process  updates  the data.
         However, as explained earlier, the output might  be
         slightly  wrong,  since access to the shared memory
         is not locked.  For example,  ``unknown  number  of
         entries''  might  be  shown.  The internal counters
         are updated after each queue  run  to  the  correct
         value again.

      2.3.5.  Forcing the queue

              Sendmail should run the queue automatically at
         intervals.  When using multiple queues, a  separate
         process  will  by default be created to run each of
         the queues unless the queue run is initiated  by  a
         user  with  the  verbose flag.  The algorithm is to
         read and sort the queue, and  then  to  attempt  to
         process all jobs in order.  When it attempts to run
         the job, sendmail first checks to see if the job is
         locked.  If so, it ignores the job.

              There  is  no  attempt to insure that only one
         queue processor exists at any time, since there  is
         no  guarantee  that  a  job  cannot take forever to
         process (however, sendmail does include  heuristics
         to try to abort jobs that are taking absurd amounts
         of time; technically, this violates RFC 821, but is
         blessed  by  RFC  1123).   Due to the locking algo-
         rithm, it is impossible for one job to  freeze  the
         entire  queue.  However, an uncooperative recipient
         host or a program recipient that never returns  can
         accumulate many processes in your system.  Unfortu-
         nately, there is no completely general way to solve
         this.

              In  some cases, you may find that a major host
         going down for a couple of days may create  a  pro-
         hibitively  large queue.  This will result in send-
         mail spending an inordinate amount of time  sorting
         the  queue.   This situation can be fixed by moving
         the queue to a temporary place and creating  a  new
         queue.   The  old  queue  can be run later when the
         offending host returns to service.

              To do this,  it  is  acceptable  to  move  the
         entire queue directory:


             cd /var/spool










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-25


             mv mqueue omqueue; mkdir mqueue; chmod 0700 mqueue

         You  should then kill the existing daemon (since it
         will still be processing in the  old  queue  direc-
         tory) and create a new daemon.

              To run the old mail queue, issue the following
         command:


             /usr/sbin/sendmail -C /etc/mail/queue.cf -q

         The -C flag specifies  an  alternate  configuration
         file queue.cf which should refer to the moved queue
         directory


             O QueueDirectory=/var/spool/omqueue

         and the -q flag says to just run every job  in  the
         queue.  You can also specify the moved queue direc-
         tory on the command line


             /usr/sbin/sendmail -oQ/var/spool/omqueue -q

         but this requires that you do not have queue groups
         in  the  configuration  file, because those are not
         subdirectories of the  moved  directory.   See  the
         section   about  ``Queue  Group  Declaration''  for
         details; you most likely need a different  configu-
         ration  file  to  correctly deal with this problem.
         However, a proper  configuration  of  queue  groups
         should  avoid  filling up queue directories, so you
         shouldn't run into this problem.   If  you  have  a
         tendency  toward voyeurism, you can use the -v flag
         to watch what is going on.

              When the queue is  finally  emptied,  you  can
         remove the directory:


             rmdir /var/spool/omqueue


      2.3.6.  Quarantined Queue Items

              It  is possible to "quarantine" mail messages,
         otherwise known  as  envelopes.   Envelopes  (queue
         files)  are  stored but not considered for delivery
         or display unless the  "quarantine"  state  of  the
         envelope  is undone or delivery or display of quar-
         antined items is requested.   Quarantined  messages










SMM:08-26          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


         are  tagged by using a different name for the queue
         file, 'hf' instead of 'qf', and by adding the quar-
         antine reason to the queue file.

              Delivery  or  display of quarantined items can
         be requested using the  -qQ  flag  to  sendmail  or
         mailq.  Additionally, messages already in the queue
         can be quarantined or unquarantined using  the  new
         -Q flag to sendmail.  For example,


             sendmail -Qreason -q[!][I|R|S][matchstring]

         Quarantines  the  normal  queue  items matching the
         criteria specified by the -q[!][I|R|S][matchstring]
         using the reason given on the -Q flag.  Likewise,


             sendmail -qQ -Q[reason] -q[!][I|R|S|Q][matchstring]

         Change  the  quarantine  reason for the quarantined
         items  matching  the  criteria  specified  by   the
         -q[!][I|R|S|Q][matchstring]  using the reason given
         on the -Q flag.  If there is no reason,
          unquarantine the matching items and make them nor-
         mal  queue  items.   Note  that  the -qQ flag tells
         sendmail to operate on quarantined items instead of
         normal items.

   2.4.  Disk Based Connection Information

           Sendmail  stores  a  large  amount of information
      about each remote system it has connected to  in  mem-
      ory.  It is possible to preserve some of this informa-
      tion on disk as well, by using the HostStatusDirectory
      option, so that it may be shared between several invo-
      cations of sendmail.  This allows mail  to  be  queued
      immediately or skipped during a queue run if there has
      been a  recent  failure  in  connecting  to  a  remote
      machine.   Note:  information about a remote system is
      stored in a file whose pathname consists of the compo-
      nents  of the hostname in reverse order.  For example,
      the information  for  host.example.com  is  stored  in
      com./example./host.   For  top-level  domains like com
      this can create a large number of subdirectories which
      on  some  filesystems  can exhaust some limits.  More-
      over, the performance of  lookups  in  directory  with
      thousands  of  entries can be fairly slow depending on
      the filesystem implementation.

           Additionally  enabling  SingleThreadDelivery  has
      the  added effect of single-threading mail delivery to
      a destination.  This  can  be  quite  helpful  if  the










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-27


      remote  machine is running an SMTP server that is eas-
      ily overloaded or cannot accept  more  than  a  single
      connection  at  a time, but can cause some messages to
      be punted to a future queue run.  It also  applies  to
      all  hosts,  so  setting  this  because  you  have one
      machine on site that runs some software that is easily
      overrun  can  cause  mail  to other hosts to be slowed
      down.  If this option is set, you probably want to set
      the  MinQueueAge  option  as  well  and  run the queue
      fairly frequently; this  way  jobs  that  are  skipped
      because  another  sendmail is talking to the same host
      will be tried again quickly rather than being  delayed
      for a long time.

           The  disk  based  host information is stored in a
      subdirectory of the  mqueue  directory  called  .host-
      stat[7].   Removing this directory and its subdirecto-
      ries has an effect similar to  the  purgestat  command
      and  is  completely  safe.   However,  purgestat  only
      removes expired (Timeout.hoststatus) data.  The infor-
      mation  in  these  directories can be perused with the
      hoststat command, which will indicate the  host  name,
      the  last  access,  and the status of that access.  An
      asterisk in the left  most  column  indicates  that  a
      sendmail  process  currently  has  the host locked for
      mail delivery.

           The disk based connection information is  treated
      the  same  way  as memory based connection information
      for the purpose of timeouts.  By default,  information
      about host failures is valid for 30 minutes.  This can
      be adjusted with the Timeout.hoststatus option.

           The connection information stored on disk may  be
      expired  at  any time with the purgestat command or by
      invoking sendmail with the -bH switch.  The connection
      information may be viewed with the hoststat command or
      by invoking sendmail with the -bh switch.

   2.5.  The Service Switch

           The implementation  of  certain  system  services
      such as host and user name lookup is controlled by the
      service switch.  If the host operating system supports
      such  a  switch, and sendmail knows about it, sendmail
      will use the native version.  Ultrix, Solaris, and DEC

____________________
   [7]This is the usual value of the HostStatusDirectory op-
tion; it can, of  course,  go  anywhere  you  like  in  your
filesystem.












SMM:08-28          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


      OSF/1 are examples of such systems[8].

           If  the underlying operating system does not sup-
      port a service switch (e.g., SunOS  4.X,  HP-UX,  BSD)
      then sendmail will provide a stub implementation.  The
      ServiceSwitchFile option points to the name of a  file
      that  has  the service definitions.  Each line has the
      name of a service and the possible implementations  of
      that service.  For example, the file:


          hosts     dns files nis
          aliases   files nis

      will ask sendmail to look for hosts in the Domain Name
      System first.  If  the  requested  host  name  is  not
      found,  it  tries  local  files,  and if that fails it
      tries NIS.  Similarly, when  looking  for  aliases  it
      will try the local files first followed by NIS.

           Notice: since sendmail must access MX records for
      correct operation, it will use DNS if it is configured
      in the ServiceSwitchFile file.  Hence an entry like


          hosts     files dns

      will not avoid DNS lookups even if a host can be found
      in /etc/hosts.

           Service switches are not  completely  integrated.
      For  example,  despite  the  fact  that the host entry
      listed in the above example specifies to look in  NIS,
      on  SunOS  this won't happen because the system imple-
      mentation of gethostbyname(3) doesn't understand this.

   2.6.  The Alias Database

           After recipient addresses are read from the  SMTP
      connection  or command line they are parsed by ruleset
      0, which must resolve to  a  {mailer,  host,  address}
      triple.   If  the flags selected by the mailer include
      the A (aliasable) flag, the address part of the triple
      is  looked up as the key (i.e., the left hand side) in
      the alias database.  If there is a match, the  address
      is  deleted  from  the send queue and all addresses on
      the right hand side of the alias are added in place of
      the  alias  that  was  found.   This  is  a  recursive
____________________
   [8]HP-UX  10  has  service  switch support, but since the
APIs are apparently not available in the libraries  sendmail
does not use the native service switch in this release.











Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-29


      operation, so aliases found in the right hand side  of
      the alias are similarly expanded.

           The alias database exists in two forms.  One is a
      text form, maintained in the  file  /etc/mail/aliases.
      The aliases are of the form


          name: name1, name2, ...

      Only local names may be aliased; e.g.,


          eric@prep.ai.MIT.EDU: eric@CS.Berkeley.EDU

      will   not   have   the   desired  effect  (except  on
      prep.ai.MIT.EDU, and they probably don't want  me)[9].
      Aliases  may be continued by starting any continuation
      lines with a space or a tab or by putting a  backslash
      directly  before  the  newline.  Blank lines and lines
      beginning with a sharp sign ("#") are comments.

           The second form is processed by  the  ndbm(3)[10]
      or  the Berkeley DB library.  This form is in the file
      /etc/mail/aliases.db    (if    using     NEWDB)     or
      /etc/mail/aliases.dir  and  /etc/mail/aliases.pag  (if
      using NDBM).  This is the form that sendmail  actually
      uses  to  resolve  aliases.  This technique is used to
      improve performance.

           The control of search order is  actually  set  by
      the service switch.  Essentially, the entry


          O AliasFile=switch:aliases

      is  always  added  as the first alias entry; also, the
      first alias file name without a class  (e.g.,  without
      "nis:"  on  the front) will be used as the name of the
      file for a ``files'' entry in the aliases switch.  For
      example, if the configuration file contains


          O AliasFile=/etc/mail/aliases

      and the service switch contains
____________________
   [9]Actually, any mailer that has the `A' mailer flag  set
will  permit aliasing; this is normally limited to the local
mailer.
   [10]The gdbm package does not work.












SMM:08-30          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


          aliases   nis files nisplus

      then  aliases  will first be searched in the NIS data-
      base, then in  /etc/mail/aliases,  then  in  the  NIS+
      database.

           You  can  also  use  NIS-based  alias files.  For
      example, the specification:


          O AliasFile=/etc/mail/aliases
          O AliasFile=nis:mail.aliases@my.nis.domain

      will first search the /etc/mail/aliases file and  then
      the   map  named  "mail.aliases"  in  "my.nis.domain".
      Warning: if you build your own NIS-based alias  files,
      be  sure  to  provide the -l flag to makedbm(8) to map
      upper case letters in the keys to lower  case;  other-
      wise,  aliases  with upper case letters in their names
      won't match incoming addresses.

           Additional flags can be  added  after  the  colon
      exactly like a K line -- for example:


          O AliasFile=nis:-N mail.aliases@my.nis.domain

      will search the appropriate NIS map and always include
      null bytes in the key.  Also:


          O AliasFile=nis:-f mail.aliases@my.nis.domain

      will prevent sendmail from downcasing the  key  before
      the alias lookup.

      2.6.1.  Rebuilding the alias database

              The hash or dbm version of the database may be
         rebuilt explicitly by executing the command


             newaliases

         This is equivalent to giving sendmail the -bi flag:


             /usr/sbin/sendmail -bi


              If you have multiple aliases databases  speci-
         fied,  the -bi flag rebuilds all the database types
         it understands (for example, it  can  rebuild  NDBM










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-31


         databases but not NIS databases).

      2.6.2.  Potential problems

              There  are a number of problems that can occur
         with the alias database.  They all  result  from  a
         sendmail process accessing the DBM version while it
         is only partially built.  This can happen under two
         circumstances:  One  process  accesses the database
         while another process  is  rebuilding  it,  or  the
         process  rebuilding the database dies (due to being
         killed or a system  crash)  before  completing  the
         rebuild.

              Sendmail   has  three  techniques  to  try  to
         relieve these problems.  First, it  ignores  inter-
         rupts  while  rebuilding  the database; this avoids
         the problem of someone aborting the process leaving
         a partially rebuilt database.  Second, it locks the
         database source file during the rebuild -- but that
         may not work over NFS or if the file is unwritable.
         Third, at the end of the rebuild it adds  an  alias
         of the form


             @: @

         (which  is  not  normally  legal).  Before sendmail
         will access the database, it checks to insure  that
         this entry exists[11].

      2.6.3.  List owners

              If  an  error  occurs  on sending to a certain
         address, say "x", sendmail will look for  an  alias
         of  the form "owner-x" to receive the errors.  This
         is typically useful for a mailing  list  where  the
         submitter of the list has no control over the main-
         tenance of the list itself; in this case  the  list
         maintainer  would  be  the  owner of the list.  For
         example:


             unix-wizards: eric@ucbarpa, wnj@monet, nosuchuser,
                  sam@matisse
             owner-unix-wizards: unix-wizards-request
             unix-wizards-request: eric@ucbarpa
____________________
   [11]The AliasWait option is required in the configuration
for this action to occur.  This should  normally  be  speci-
fied.












SMM:08-32          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


         would cause "eric@ucbarpa" to get  the  error  that
         will  occur  when someone sends to unix-wizards due
         to the inclusion of "nosuchuser" on the list.

              List owners also  cause  the  envelope  sender
         address  to be modified.  The contents of the owner
         alias are used if they point to a single user, oth-
         erwise  the  name of the alias itself is used.  For
         this reason, and to obey Internet conventions,  the
         "owner-"  address normally points at the "-request"
         address; this causes messages to go  out  with  the
         typical   Internet   convention  of  using  ``list-
         request'' as the return address.

   2.7.  User Information Database

           This option is deprecated, use virtusertable  and
      genericstable  instead  as explained in cf/README.  If
      you have a version of sendmail with the user  informa-
      tion  database compiled in, and you have specified one
      or more databases using the U  option,  the  databases
      will be searched for a user:maildrop entry.  If found,
      the mail will be sent to the specified address.

   2.8.  Per-User Forwarding (.forward Files)

           As an alternative to the alias database, any user
      may  put a file with the name ".forward" in his or her
      home directory.  If this file exists,  sendmail  redi-
      rects  mail  for  that  user  to the list of addresses
      listed in the .forward file.  Note  that  aliases  are
      fully  expanded  before  forward files are referenced.
      For example, if the home directory for user "mckusick"
      has a .forward file with contents:


          mckusick@ernie
          kirk@calder

      then  any  mail  arriving for "mckusick" will be redi-
      rected to the specified accounts.

           Actually,  the  configuration  file   defines   a
      sequence  of  filenames to check.  By default, this is
      the user's .forward file, but can  be  defined  to  be
      more  generally  using the ForwardPath option.  If you
      change this, you will have to inform your user base of
      the  change; .forward is pretty well incorporated into
      the collective subconscious.














Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-33


   2.9.  Special Header Lines

           Several header lines have special interpretations
      defined by the configuration file.  Others have inter-
      pretations built into sendmail that cannot be  changed
      without   changing  the  code.   These  built-ins  are
      described here.

      2.9.1.  Errors-To:

              If errors occur  anywhere  during  processing,
         this  header will cause error messages to go to the
         listed addresses.  This  is  intended  for  mailing
         lists.

              The  Errors-To:  header was created in the bad
         old days when UUCP didn't understand  the  distinc-
         tion  between  an envelope and a header; this was a
         hack to provide what should now be  passed  as  the
         envelope sender address.  It should go away.  It is
         only used if the UseErrorsTo option is set.

              The Errors-To: header is officially deprecated
         and will go away in a future release.

      2.9.2.  Apparently-To:

              RFC  822 requires at least one recipient field
         (To:, Cc:, or Bcc: line) in every  message.   If  a
         message  comes  in with no recipients listed in the
         message then sendmail will adjust the header  based
         on the "NoRecipientAction" option.  One of the pos-
         sible actions is to add an "Apparently-To:"  header
         line for any recipients it is aware of.

              The  Apparently-To: header is non-standard and
         is both deprecated and strongly discouraged.

      2.9.3.  Precedence

              The Precedence: header can be used as a  crude
         control  of  message  priority.  It tweaks the sort
         order in the queue and can be configured to  change
         the  message  timeout  values.  The precedence of a
         message also controls how delivery status notifica-
         tions (DSNs) are processed for that message.

   2.10.  IDENT Protocol Support

           Sendmail  supports  the IDENT protocol as defined
      in RFC 1413.  Note that the RFC states a client should
      wait  at least 30 seconds for a response.  The default
      Timeout.ident is 5 seconds as many sites have  adopted










SMM:08-34          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


      the practice of dropping IDENT queries.  This has lead
      to delays processing  mail.   Although  this  enhances
      identification  of  the  author of an email message by
      doing a ``call back'' to  the  originating  system  to
      include  the  owner  of a particular TCP connection in
      the audit trail it is in no sense  perfect;  a  deter-
      mined forger can easily spoof the IDENT protocol.  The
      following description is excerpted from RFC 1413:

           6.  Security Considerations

           The information returned by this protocol  is  at
           most  as  trustworthy as the host providing it OR
           the organization operating the host.   For  exam-
           ple,  a PC in an open lab has few if any controls
           on it to prevent a user from having this protocol
           return  any identifier the user wants.  Likewise,
           if the host has been compromised the  information
           returned may be completely erroneous and mislead-
           ing.

           The Identification Protocol is not intended as an
           authorization  or  access  control  protocol.  At
           best, it provides some additional auditing infor-
           mation  with  respect  to  TCP  connections.   At
           worst, it can provide misleading,  incorrect,  or
           maliciously incorrect information.

           The  use of the information returned by this pro-
           tocol for other than auditing  is  strongly  dis-
           couraged.    Specifically,  using  Identification
           Protocol information to make access control deci-
           sions  -  either  as the primary method (i.e., no
           other checks) or as an adjunct to  other  methods
           may  result  in  a weakening of normal host secu-
           rity.

           An Identification server may  reveal  information
           about users, entities, objects or processes which
           might normally be considered private.  An Identi-
           fication server provides service which is a rough
           analog of the CallerID services provided by  some
           phone companies and many of the same privacy con-
           siderations and arguments that apply to the  Cal-
           lerID  service  apply  to Identification.  If you
           wouldn't run a "finger"  server  due  to  privacy
           considerations  you may not want to run this pro-
           tocol.

      In some cases your system may not work  properly  with
      IDENT  support  due to a bug in the TCP/IP implementa-
      tion.  The symptoms will be that for  some  hosts  the
      SMTP connection will be closed almost immediately.  If










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-35


      this is true or if you do not want to use  IDENT,  you
      should  set  the IDENT timeout to zero; this will dis-
      able the IDENT protocol.

3.  ARGUMENTS

        The  complete  list  of  arguments  to  sendmail  is
   described  in detail in Appendix A.  Some important argu-
   ments are described here.

   3.1.  Queue Interval

           The amount of time between forking a  process  to
      run  through  the queue is defined by the -q flag.  If
      you run with delivery mode set to i or b this  can  be
      relatively  large, since it will only be relevant when
      a host that was down comes back up.  If you run  in  q
      mode  it  should be relatively short, since it defines
      the maximum amount of time that a message may  sit  in
      the queue.  (See also the MinQueueAge option.)

           RFC  1123  section  5.3.1.1  says that this value
      should be at least 30 minutes (although that  probably
      doesn't make sense if you use ``queue-only'' mode).

           Notice:  the meaning of the interval time depends
      on whether normal queue runners  or  persistent  queue
      runners  are  used.   For  the  former, it is the time
      between subsequent starts of a  queue  run.   For  the
      latter,  it is the time sendmail waits after a persis-
      tent queue runner has finished its work to  start  the
      next  one.   Hence  for  persistent queue runners this
      interval should be very low, typically  no  more  than
      two minutes.

   3.2.  Daemon Mode

           If  you  allow  incoming mail over an IPC connec-
      tion, you should have a daemon running.   This  should
      be  set  by your /etc/rc file using the -bd flag.  The
      -bd flag and the -q flag may be combined in one call:


          /usr/sbin/sendmail -bd -q30m


           An alternative approach  is  to  invoke  sendmail
      from  inetd(8)  (use the -bs -Am flags to ask sendmail
      to speak SMTP on its standard input and output and  to
      run  as MTA).  This works and allows you to wrap send-
      mail in a TCP wrapper program, but may be a bit slower
      since  the  configuration  file  has  to be re-read on
      every message that comes in.   If  you  do  this,  you










SMM:08-36          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


      still  need  to  have  a sendmail running to flush the
      queue:


          /usr/sbin/sendmail -q30m


   3.3.  Forcing the Queue

           In some cases you may find  that  the  queue  has
      gotten clogged for some reason.  You can force a queue
      run using the -q flag (with no value).  It  is  enter-
      taining to use the -v flag (verbose) when this is done
      to watch what happens:


          /usr/sbin/sendmail -q -v


           You can also limit the jobs to those with a  par-
      ticular  queue  identifier, recipient, sender, quaran-
      tine reason, or queue group using  one  of  the  queue
      modifiers.   For  example, "-qRberkeley" restricts the
      queue run to jobs  that  have  the  string  "berkeley"
      somewhere  in  one  of the recipient addresses.  Simi-
      larly,  "-qSstring"  limits  the  run  to   particular
      senders,  "-qIstring"  limits  it  to particular queue
      identifiers, and "-qQstring" limits it  to  particular
      quarantined  reasons  and only operated on quarantined
      queue items, and "-qGstring" limits it to a particular
      queue  group.   The named queue group will be run even
      if it is set to have 0 runners.  You may also place an
      !   before  the I or R or S or Q to indicate that jobs
      are limited to not including a particular queue  iden-
      tifier,  recipient or sender.  For example, "-q!Rseat-
      tle" limits the queue run to jobs that do not have the
      string  "seattle"  somewhere  in  one of the recipient
      addresses.  Should you need  to  terminate  the  queue
      jobs  currently active then a SIGTERM to the parent of
      the process (or processes) will cleanly stop the jobs.

   3.4.  Debugging

           There are a fairly large number  of  debug  flags
      built  into  sendmail.  Each debug flag has a category
      and a level.  Higher  levels  increase  the  level  of
      debugging activity; in most cases, this means to print
      out more information.  The convention is  that  levels
      greater  than  nine are "absurd," i.e., they print out
      so much information that you wouldn't normally want to
      see them except for debugging that particular piece of
      code.











Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-37


           You should never run a production sendmail server
      in debug mode.  Many of the debug flags will result in
      debug output being sent over the SMTP  channel  unless
      the  option  -D  is used.  This will confuse many mail
      programs.  However, for testing purposes,  it  can  be
      useful  when  sending  mail manually via telnet to the
      port you are using while debugging.

           A debug category is either an integer,  like  42,
      or  a  name,  like  ANSI.   You can specify a range of
      numeric debug categories using the syntax 17-42.   You
      can  specify  a  set of named debug categories using a
      glob pattern like "sm_trace_*".  At present, only  "*"
      and "?"  are supported in these glob patterns.

           Debug flags are set using the -d option; the syn-
      tax is:


          debug-flag:        -d debug-list
          debug-list:        debug-option [ , debug-option ]*
          debug-option:      debug-categories [ . debug-level ]
          debug-categories:  integer | integer - integer | category-pattern
          category-pattern:  [a-zA-Z_*?][a-zA-Z0-9_*?]*
          debug-level:       integer

      where spaces are for reading ease only.  For example,


          -d12               Set category 12 to level 1
          -d12.3             Set category 12 to level 3
          -d3-17             Set categories 3 through 17 to level 1
          -d3-17.4           Set categories 3 through 17 to level 4
          -dANSI             Set category ANSI to level 1
          -dsm_trace_*.3     Set all named categories matching sm_trace_* to level 3

      For a complete list of the available debug  flags  you
      will  have to look at the code and the TRACEFLAGS file
      in the sendmail distribution (they are too dynamic  to
      keep  this  document up to date).  For a list of named
      debug categories in the sendmail binary, use


          ident /usr/sbin/sendmail | grep Debug


   3.5.  Changing the Values of Options

           Options can be overridden using the -o or -O com-
      mand line flags.  For example,


          /usr/sbin/sendmail -oT2m










SMM:08-38          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


      sets  the  T  (timeout) option to two minutes for this
      run only; the equivalent line using  the  long  option
      name is


          /usr/sbin/sendmail -OTimeout.queuereturn=2m


           Some  options  have security implications.  Send-
      mail allows you to set  these,  but  relinquishes  its
      set-user-ID   or   set-group-ID   permissions   there-
      after[12].

   3.6.  Trying a Different Configuration File

           An  alternative  configuration file can be speci-
      fied using the -C flag; for example,


          /usr/sbin/sendmail -Ctest.cf -oQ/tmp/mqueue

      uses the configuration file  test.cf  instead  of  the
      default  /etc/mail/sendmail.cf.  If the -C flag has no
      value it defaults to sendmail.cf in the current direc-
      tory.

           Sendmail  gives  up  set-user-ID root permissions
      (if it has been installed set-user-ID root)  when  you
      use  this  flag,  so  it  is  common to use a publicly
      writable directory (such as /tmp) as the queue  direc-
      tory (QueueDirectory or Q option) while testing.

   3.7.  Logging Traffic

           Many  SMTP implementations do not fully implement
      the protocol.  For  example,  some  personal  computer
      based  SMTPs  do  not understand continuation lines in
      reply codes.  These can be very hard to trace.  If you
      suspect  such  a  problem, you can set traffic logging
      using the -X flag.  For example,


          /usr/sbin/sendmail -X /tmp/traffic -bd

      will log all traffic in the file /tmp/traffic.

____________________
   [12]That is, it sets its effective uid to the  real  uid;
thus,  if  you are executing as root, as from root's crontab
file or during system  startup  the  root  permissions  will
still be honored.












Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-39


           This logs a lot of data very quickly  and  should
      NEVER  be used during normal operations.  After start-
      ing up such a daemon, force the errant  implementation
      to  send  a message to your host.  All message traffic
      in and out of sendmail, including  the  incoming  SMTP
      traffic, will be logged in this file.

   3.8.  Testing Configuration Files

           When  you build a configuration table, you can do
      a certain amount of testing using the "test  mode"  of
      sendmail.  For example, you could invoke sendmail as:


          sendmail -bt -Ctest.cf

      which  would read the configuration file "test.cf" and
      enter test mode.  In this mode, you enter lines of the
      form:


          rwset address

      where  rwset  is the rewriting set you want to use and
      address is an address to apply the set to.  Test  mode
      shows  you  the steps it takes as it proceeds, finally
      showing you the address it ends up with.  You may  use
      a comma separated list of rwsets for sequential appli-
      cation of rules to an input.  For example:


          3,1,21,4 monet:bollard

      first applies ruleset three to the  input  "monet:bol-
      lard."   Ruleset  one is then applied to the output of
      ruleset three, followed similarly by rulesets  twenty-
      one and four.

           If  you  need  more  detail, you can also use the
      "-d21" flag to turn on more debugging.  For example,


          sendmail -bt -d21.99

      turns on an incredible amount of information; a single
      word  address  is  probably going to print out several
      pages worth of information.

           You should be warned  that  internally,  sendmail
      applies  ruleset 3 to all addresses.  In test mode you
      will have to do that  manually.   For  example,  older
      versions allowed you to use











SMM:08-40          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


          0 bruce@broadcast.sony.com

      This version requires that you use:


          3,0 bruce@broadcast.sony.com


           As of version 8.7, some other syntaxes are avail-
      able in test mode:

      .Dxvalue  defines macro x to have the indicated value.
                This is useful when debugging rules that use
                the $&x syntax.

      .Ccvalue  adds the indicated value to class c.

      =Sruleset dumps the contents of the indicated ruleset.

      -ddebug-spec
                is equivalent to the command-line flag.

      Version 8.9 introduced more features:

      ?         shows a help message.

      =M        display the known mailers.

      $m        print the value of macro m.

      $=c       print the contents of class c.

      /mx host  returns the MX records for `host'.

      /parse address
                parse address, returning the value of crack-
                addr, and the parsed address.

      /try mailer addr
                rewrite  address  into the form it will have
                when presented to the indicated mailer.

      /tryflags flags
                set flags used by parsing.  The flags can be
                `H'  for Header or `E' for Envelope, and `S'
                for Sender or `R' for Recipient.  These  can
                be  combined,  `HR'  sets  flags  for header
                recipients.

      /canon hostname
                try to canonify hostname.












Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-41


      /map mapname key
                look up `key' in the indicated `mapname'.

      /quit     quit address test mode.

   3.9.  Persistent Host Status Information

           When HostStatusDirectory is enabled,  information
      about  the  status  of hosts is maintained on disk and
      can thus be shared between different instantiations of
      sendmail.  The status of the last connection with each
      remote host may be viewed with the command:


          sendmail -bh

      This information may be flushed with the command:


          sendmail -bH

      Flushing the information prevents  new  sendmail  pro-
      cesses  from loading it, but does not prevent existing
      processes from using the status information that  they
      already have.

4.  TUNING

        There  are  a number of configuration parameters you
   may want to change, depending on the requirements of your
   site.   Most of these are set using an option in the con-
   figuration  file.   For  example,  the  line   "O   Time-
   out.queuereturn=5d"  sets option "Timeout.queuereturn" to
   the value "5d" (five days).

        Most of these options have appropriate defaults  for
   most  sites.   However, sites having very high mail loads
   may find they need to tune them as appropriate for  their
   mail  load.   In  particular,  sites experiencing a large
   number of small messages, many of which are delivered  to
   many  recipients,  may  find that they need to adjust the
   parameters dealing with queue priorities.

        All versions of sendmail prior  to  8.7  had  single
   character  option  names.   As  of 8.7, options have long
   (multi-character names).  Although old  short  names  are
   still accepted, most new options do not have short equiv-
   alents.

        This section only describes the options you are most
   likely to want to tweak; read section 5 for more details.












SMM:08-42          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


   4.1.  Timeouts

           All time intervals are set using a scaled syntax.
      For example, "10m"  represents  ten  minutes,  whereas
      "2h30m" represents two and a half hours.  The full set
      of scales is:


          s   seconds
          m   minutes
          h   hours
          d   days
          w   weeks


      4.1.1.  Queue interval

              The argument to  the  -q  flag  specifies  how
         often  a  sub-daemon  will  run the queue.  This is
         typically set to between fifteen  minutes  and  one
         hour.   If  not set, or set to zero, the queue will
         not be run automatically.  RFC 1123 section 5.3.1.1
         recommends  that  this  be  at  least  30  minutes.
         Should you need to terminate the  queue  jobs  cur-
         rently  active  then a SIGTERM to the parent of the
         process (or processes) will cleanly stop the jobs.

      4.1.2.  Read timeouts

              Timeouts all have option names "Timeout.subop-
         tion".  Most of these control SMTP operations.  The
         recognized suboptions, their  default  values,  and
         the  minimum  values  allowed  by  RFC 2821 section
         4.5.3.2 (or RFC 1123 section 5.3.2) are:

         connect   The time to wait for an  SMTP  connection
                   to  open (the connect(2) system call) [0,
                   unspecified].  If zero, uses  the  kernel
                   default.   In  no  case  can  this option
                   extend the timeout longer than the kernel
                   provides, but it can shorten it.  This is
                   to get around  kernels  that  provide  an
                   absurdly long connection timeout (90 min-
                   utes in one case).

         iconnect  The same as connect,  except  it  applies
                   only to the initial attempt to connect to
                   a host for a given message  [0,  unspeci-
                   fied].   The  concept is that this should
                   be very short (a few seconds); hosts that
                   are  well  connected  and responsive will
                   thus be serviced immediately.  Hosts that
                   are   slow   will   not   hold  up  other










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-43


                   deliveries  in   the   initial   delivery
                   attempt.

         aconnect  [0,   unspecified]  The  overall  timeout
                   waiting for all connection for  a  single
                   delivery  attempt  to  succeed.  If 0, no
                   overall limit is applied.   This  can  be
                   used to restrict the total amount of time
                   trying to connect to a long list of  host
                   that  could  accept  an  e-mail  for  the
                   recipient.  This timeout does  not  apply
                   to  FallbackMXhost,  i.e., if the time is
                   exhausted, the  FallbackMXhost  is  tried
                   next.

         initial   The  wait  for  the  initial 220 greeting
                   message [5m, 5m].

         helo      The wait for a reply from a HELO or  EHLO
                   command   [5m,  unspecified].   This  may
                   require a host name lookup, so five  min-
                   utes is probably a reasonable minimum.

         mail*     The  wait for a reply from a MAIL command
                   [10m, 5m].

         rcpt*     The wait for a reply from a RCPT  command
                   [1h, 5m].  This should be long because it
                   could be pointing at a list that takes  a
                   long time to expand (see below).

         datainit* The  wait for a reply from a DATA command
                   [5m, 2m].

         datablock*#
                   The wait for reading a data  block  (that
                   is,  the body of the message).  [1h, 3m].
                   This  should  be  long  because  it  also
                   applies to programs piping input to send-
                   mail which have no guarantee  of  prompt-
                   ness.

         datafinal*
                   The  wait for a reply from the dot termi-
                   nating a message.  [1h, 10m].  If this is
                   shorter than the time actually needed for
                   the  receiver  to  deliver  the  message,
                   duplicates  will  be  generated.  This is
                   discussed in RFC 1047.

         rset      The wait for a reply from a RSET  command
                   [5m, unspecified].











SMM:08-44          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


         quit      The  wait for a reply from a QUIT command
                   [2m, unspecified].

         misc      The wait for a reply  from  miscellaneous
                   (but  short)  commands  such as NOOP (no-
                   operation)  and  VERB  (go  into  verbose
                   mode).  [2m, unspecified].

         command*# In  server  SMTP,  the  time  to wait for
                   another command.  [1h, 5m].

         ident#    The timeout waiting for  a  reply  to  an
                   IDENT query [5s[13], unspecified].

         lhlo      The wait for a reply to an LMTP LHLO com-
                   mand [2m, unspecified].

         auth      The  timeout  for a reply in an SMTP AUTH
                   dialogue [10m, unspecified].

         starttls  The timeout for a reply to an SMTP START-
                   TLS  command  and  the TLS handshake [1h,
                   unspecified].

         fileopen# The  timeout  for  opening  .forward  and
                   :include: files [60s, none].

         control#  The timeout for a complete control socket
                   transaction to complete [2m, none].

         hoststatus#
                   How long status information about a  host
                   (e.g.,  host  down) will be cached before
                   it is  considered  stale  [30m,  unspeci-
                   fied].

         resolver.retrans#
                   The resolver's retransmission time inter-
                   val (in  seconds)  [varies].   Sets  both
                   Timeout.resolver.retrans.first  and Time-
                   out.resolver.retrans.normal.

         resolver.retrans.first#
                   The resolver's retransmission time inter-
                   val (in seconds) for the first attempt to
                   deliver a message [varies].


____________________
   [13]On  some systems the default is zero to turn the pro-
tocol off entirely.












Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-45


         resolver.retrans.normal#
                   The resolver's retransmission time inter-
                   val (in seconds) for all resolver lookups
                   except   the   first   delivery   attempt
                   [varies].

         resolver.retry#
                   The  number  of  times  to  retransmit  a
                   resolver   query.    Sets   both    Time-
                   out.resolver.retry.first     and    Time-
                   out.resolver.retry.normal [varies].

         resolver.retry.first#
                   The  number  of  times  to  retransmit  a
                   resolver  query  for the first attempt to
                   deliver a message [varies].

         resolver.retry.normal#
                   The  number  of  times  to  retransmit  a
                   resolver query for all resolver lookups
                    except   the   first   delivery  attempt
                   [varies].

         For compatibility with old configuration files,  if
         no  suboption is specified, all the timeouts marked
         with an asterick  (*)  are  set  to  the  indicated
         value.   All but those marked with a pound sign (#)
         apply to client SMTP.

              For example, the lines:


             O Timeout.command=25m
             O Timeout.datablock=3h

         sets the server SMTP command timeout to 25  minutes
         and the input data block timeout to three hours.

      4.1.3.  Message timeouts

              After  sitting in the queue for a few days, an
         undeliverable message will time out.   This  is  to
         insure  that  at  least  the sender is aware of the
         inability to send a message.  The timeout is  typi-
         cally set to five days.  It is sometimes considered
         convenient to also send a warning  message  if  the
         message  is  in  the  queue longer than a few hours
         (assuming you normally have good  connectivity;  if
         your  messages  normally took several hours to send
         you wouldn't want to do this because it wouldn't be
         an  unusual  event).   These timeouts are set using
         the   Timeout.queuereturn   and   Timeout.queuewarn
         options  in the configuration file (previously both










SMM:08-46          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


         were set using the T option).

              If the message is submitted using  the  NOTIFY
         SMTP  extension, warning messages will only be sent
         if NOTIFY=DELAY is specified.  The queuereturn  and
         queuewarn  timeouts can be further qualified with a
         tag based on the Precedence: field in the  message;
         they must be one of "urgent" (indicating a positive
         non-zero precedence), "normal" (indicating  a  zero
         precedence),  or  "non-urgent" (indicating negative
         precedences).  For example, setting "Timeout.queue-
         warn.urgent=1h" sets the warning timeout for urgent
         messages only to  one  hour.   The  default  if  no
         precedence  is  indicated is to set the timeout for
         all precedences.   If  the  message  has  a  normal
         (default)  precedence  and  it is a delivery status
         notification  (DSN),  Timeout.queuereturn.dsn   and
         Timeout.queuewarn.dsn can be used to give an alter-
         native warn and return time for  DSNs.   The  value
         "now"  can  be  used  for -O Timeout.queuereturn to
         return entries  immediately  during  a  queue  run,
         e.g.,  to bounce messages independent of their time
         in the queue.

              Since these options are global, and since  you
         cannot  know a priori how long another host outside
         your domain will be down, a  five  day  timeout  is
         recommended.   This  allows  a recipient to fix the
         problem even if it occurs at  the  beginning  of  a
         long  weekend.   RFC 1123 section 5.3.1.1 says that
         this parameter should be ``at least 4-5 days''.

              The Timeout.queuewarn value can be piggybacked
         on  the T option by indicating a time after which a
         warning message should be sent;  the  two  timeouts
         are separated by a slash.  For example, the line


             OT5d/4h

         causes email to fail after five days, but a warning
         message will be sent after four hours.  This should
         be  large  enough  that  the message will have been
         tried several times.

   4.2.  Forking During Queue Runs

           By setting the ForkEachJob (Y)  option,  sendmail
      will fork before each individual message while running
      the queue.  This option was used with earlier releases
      to  prevent  sendmail  from consuming large amounts of
      memory.  It should no longer be necessary  with  send-
      mail  8.12.   If  the  ForkEachJob  option is not set,










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-47


      sendmail will keep track of hosts that are down during
      a  queue  run,  which can improve performance dramati-
      cally.

           If the ForkEachJob option is set, sendmail cannot
      use connection caching.

   4.3.  Queue Priorities

           Every  message  is assigned a priority when it is
      first instantiated, consisting of the message size (in
      bytes)  offset  by  the message class (which is deter-
      mined from the Precedence:  header)  times  the  "work
      class  factor"  and the number of recipients times the
      "work recipient factor."   The  priority  is  used  to
      order the queue.  Higher numbers for the priority mean
      that the message will be processed later when  running
      the queue.

           The  message  size is included so that large mes-
      sages are penalized relative to small  messages.   The
      message  class  allows  users  to send "high priority"
      messages by including a "Precedence:" field  in  their
      message; the value of this field is looked up in the P
      lines of the configuration file.  Since the number  of
      recipients  affects  the  amount  of  load  a  message
      presents to the system, this is also included into the
      priority.

           The recipient and class factors can be set in the
      configuration file using the RecipientFactor  (y)  and
      ClassFactor (z) options respectively.  They default to
      30000 (for the recipient factor)  and  1800  (for  the
      class factor).  The initial priority is:

     pri=msgsize-(classxClassFactor)+(nrcptxRecipientFactor)

      (Remember,  higher  values for this parameter actually
      mean that the job will be treated  with  lower  prior-
      ity.)

           The  priority  of a job can also be adjusted each
      time it is processed (that is, each time an attempt is
      made  to deliver it) using the "work time factor," set
      by the RetryFactor (Z) option.  This is added  to  the
      priority,  so  it normally decreases the precedence of
      the job, on the grounds that  jobs  that  have  failed
      many times will tend to fail again in the future.  The
      RetryFactor option defaults to 90000.














SMM:08-48          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


   4.4.  Load Limiting

           Sendmail can be asked to queue (but not  deliver)
      mail  if  the  system load average gets too high using
      the QueueLA (x) option.  When the load average exceeds
      the  value of the QueueLA option, the delivery mode is
      set to q (queue only) if the  QueueFactor  (q)  option
      divided  by the difference in the current load average
      and the QueueLA option plus one is less than the  pri-
      ority of the message -- that is, the message is queued
      iff:

                        pri>LQueueFactor_

      The QueueFactor option defaults  to  600000,  so  each
      point  of load average is worth 600000 priority points
      (as described above).

           For  drastic  cases,  the  RefuseLA  (X)   option
      defines  a  load average at which sendmail will refuse
      to  accept  network  connections.   Locally  generated
      mail,  i.e.,  mail  which  is  not  submitted via SMTP
      (including incoming UUCP  mail),  is  still  accepted.
      Notice  that the MSP submits mail to the MTA via SMTP,
      and hence mail will be queued in the client  queue  in
      such  a  case.   Therefore  it is necessary to run the
      client mail queue periodically.

   4.5.  Resource Limits

           Sendmail  has  several  parameters   to   control
      resource  usage.  Besides those mentionted in the pre-
      vious section, there are at  least  MaxDaemonChildren,
      ConnectionRateThrottle,  MaxQueueChildren, and MaxRun-
      nersPerQueue.  The latter  two  limit  the  number  of
      sendmail  processes  that operate on the queue.  These
      are discussed in the section  ``Queue  Group  Declara-
      tion''.   The former two can be used to limit the num-
      ber of incoming connections.  Their appropriate values
      depend  on the host operating system and the hardware,
      e.g., amount of memory.  In many situations  it  might
      be  useful  to  set limits to prevent to have too many
      sendmail  processes,  however,  these  limits  can  be
      abused to mount a denial of service attack.  For exam-
      ple, if MaxDaemonChildren=10 then an attacker needs to
      open  only  10 SMTP sessions to the server, leave them
      idle for most of the time,  and  no  more  connections
      will  be  accepted.   If  this  option is set then the
      timeouts used in a SMTP session should be lowered from
      their default values to their minimum values as speci-
      fied in RFC 2821 and listed in section 4.1.2.












Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-49


   4.6.  Measures against Denial of Service Attacks

           Sendmail has some built-in measures against  sim-
      ple  denial of service (DoS) attacks.  The SMTP server
      by default slows down if too  many  bad  commands  are
      issued  or  if  some  commands  are repeated too often
      within a session.  Details can be found in the  source
      file sendmail/srvrsmtp.c by looking for the macro def-
      initions of MAXBADCOMMANDS, MAXNOOPCOMMANDS,  MAXHELO-
      COMMANDS, MAXVRFYCOMMANDS, and MAXETRNCOMMANDS.  If an
      SMTP command is issued more often than the correspond-
      ing MAXcmdCOMMANDS value, then the response is delayed
      exponentially, starting with a sleep time of one  sec-
      ond,  up  to  a maximum of four minutes (as defined by
      MAXTIMEOUT).  If the option MaxDaemonChildren  is  set
      to  a  value greater than zero, then this could make a
      DoS attack even worse since it keeps a connection open
      longer than necessary.  Therefore a connection is ter-
      minated with a 421 SMTP reply code if  the  number  of
      commands  exceeds  the  limit  by  a factor of two and
      MAXBADCOMMANDS is set to a  value  greater  than  zero
      (the default is 25).

   4.7.  Delivery Mode

           There  are  a number of delivery modes that send-
      mail can operate in, set by the DeliveryMode (d)  con-
      figuration  option.   These  modes specify how quickly
      mail will be delivered.  Legal modes are:


          i   deliver interactively (synchronously)
          b   deliver in background (asynchronously)
          q   queue only (don't deliver)
          d   defer delivery attempts (don't deliver)

      There are tradeoffs.  Mode "i" gives  the  sender  the
      quickest  feedback, but may slow down some mailers and
      is hardly ever necessary.  Mode "b" delivers  promptly
      but can cause large numbers of processes if you have a
      mailer that takes a long time to  deliver  a  message.
      Mode "q" minimizes the load on your machine, but means
      that delivery may be  delayed  for  up  to  the  queue
      interval.   Mode  "d"  is identical to mode "q" except
      that it also prevents lookups in maps including the -D
      flag  from  working during the initial queue phase; it
      is intended for ``dial on  demand''  sites  where  DNS
      lookups might cost real money.  Some simple error mes-
      sages (e.g., host unknown during  the  SMTP  protocol)
      will  be  delayed  using  this  mode.  Mode "b" is the
      usual default.












SMM:08-50          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


           If you run in mode "q" (queue only), "d" (defer),
      or  "b"  (deliver  in  background)  sendmail  will not
      expand aliases and follow .forward files upon  initial
      receipt  of  the mail.  This speeds up the response to
      RCPT commands.  Mode "i" should not  be  used  by  the
      SMTP server.

   4.8.  Log Level

           The  level  of  logging  can be set for sendmail.
      The default using a standard  configuration  table  is
      level 9.  The levels are as follows:

      0    Minimal logging.

      1    Serious  system  failures  and potential security
           problems.

      2    Lost communications (network problems) and proto-
           col failures.

      3    Other   serious  failures,  malformed  addresses,
           transient  forward/include   errors,   connection
           timeouts.

      4    Minor failures, out of date alias databases, con-
           nection rejections via check_ rulesets.

      5    Message collection statistics.

      6    Creation of error messages, VRFY  and  EXPN  com-
           mands.

      7    Delivery failures (host or user unknown, etc.).

      8    Successful    deliveries   and   alias   database
           rebuilds.

      9    Messages being deferred  (due  to  a  host  being
           down, etc.).

      10   Database  expansion  (alias,  forward, and userdb
           lookups) and authentication information.

      11   NIS errors and end of job processing.

      12   Logs all SMTP connections.

      13   Log bad user shells, files with improper  permis-
           sions, and other questionable situations.

      14   Logs refused connections.











Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-51


      15   Log all incoming and outgoing SMTP commands.

      20   Logs  attempts  to run locked queue files.  These
           are not errors, but can be useful to note if your
           queue appears to be clogged.

      30   Lost  locks  (only  if  using  lockf  instead  of
           flock).

      Additionally,  values  above  64  are   reserved   for
      extremely  verbose  debugging  output.  No normal site
      would ever set these.

   4.9.  File Modes

           The modes used for files depend on what function-
      ality  you want and the level of security you require.
      In many cases sendmail does careful  checking  of  the
      modes  of  files  and  directories to avoid accidental
      compromise; if you want to make it  possible  to  have
      group-writable  support  files you may need to use the
      DontBlameSendmail option to turn  off  some  of  these
      checks.

      4.9.1.  To suid or not to suid?

              Sendmail is no longer installed set-user-ID to
         root.  sendmail/SECURITY explains how to  configure
         and  install  sendmail  without set-user-ID to root
         but set-group-ID which is the default configuration
         starting with 8.12.

              The  daemon usually runs as root, unless other
         measures are taken.  At the point where sendmail is
         about  to exec(2) a mailer, it checks to see if the
         userid is zero (root); if so, it resets the  userid
         and  groupid  to a default (set by the U= equate in
         the mailer line; if that is not set,  the  Default-
         User  option  is  used).  This can be overridden by
         setting the S flag to the mailer for  mailers  that
         are  trusted  and must be called as root.  However,
         this will cause mail  processing  to  be  accounted
         (using sa(8)) to root rather than to the user send-
         ing the mail.

              A  middle  ground  is  to  set  the  RunAsUser
         option.   This  causes sendmail to become the indi-
         cated user as soon as it has done the startup  that
         requires  root  privileges  (primarily, opening the
         SMTP socket).  If  you  use  RunAsUser,  the  queue
         directory  (normally  /var/spool/mqueue)  should be
         owned by that user, and  all  files  and  databases
         (including   user   .forward  files,  alias  files,










SMM:08-52          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


         :include: files, and external  databases)  must  be
         readable  by  that user.  Also, since sendmail will
         not be able to change its uid, delivery to programs
         or files will be marked as unsafe, e.g., undeliver-
         able, in .forward, aliases,  and  :include:  files.
         Administrators  can  override  this  by setting the
         DontBlameSendmail option to  the  setting  NonRoot-
         SafeAddr.   RunAsUser  is  probably best suited for
         firewall configurations  that  don't  have  regular
         user  logins.   If  the  option is used on a system
         which  performs  local  delivery,  then  the  local
         delivery  agent  must  have  the proper permissions
         (i.e., usually set-user-ID root) since it  will  be
         invoked by the RunAsUser, not by root.

      4.9.2.  Turning off security checks

              Sendmail is very particular about the modes of
         files that it reads or  writes.   For  example,  by
         default  it will refuse to read most files that are
         group writable on the grounds that they might  have
         been tampered with by someone other than the owner;
         it will even refuse to read files in group writable
         directories.   Also, sendmail will refuse to create
         a new aliases database in an unsafe directory.  You
         can  get around this by manually creating the data-
         base file as a trusted user ahead of time and  then
         rebuilding the aliases database with newaliases.

              If  you are quite sure that your configuration
         is safe and you want sendmail to avoid these  secu-
         rity  checks, you can turn off certain checks using
         the DontBlameSendmail option.   This  option  takes
         one  or  more  names  that  disable checks.  In the
         descriptions that follow, "unsafe directory"  means
         a  directory  that is writable by anyone other than
         the owner.  The values are:

         Safe No special handling.

         AssumeSafeChown
              Assume  that  the   chown   system   call   is
              restricted  to  root.   Since some versions of
              UNIX permit regular users to give  away  their
              files  to  other  users  on  some filesystems,
              sendmail often cannot assume that a given file
              was created by the owner, particularly when it
              is in a writable directory.  You can set  this
              flag   if  you  know  that  file  giveaway  is
              restricted on your system.

         ClassFileInUnsafeDirPath
              When reading class files (using the F line  in










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-53


              the  configuration file), allow files that are
              in unsafe directories.

         DontWarnForwardFileInUnsafeDirPath
              Prevent logging of unsafe directory path warn-
              ings for non-existent forward files.

         ErrorHeaderInUnsafeDirPath
              Allow the file named in the ErrorHeader option
              to be in an unsafe directory.

         FileDeliveryToHardLink
              Allow delivery to files that are hard links.

         FileDeliveryToSymLink
              Allow delivery  to  files  that  are  symbolic
              links.

         ForwardFileInGroupWritableDirPath
              Allow  .forward files in group writable direc-
              tories.

         ForwardFileInUnsafeDirPath
              Allow .forward files in unsafe directories.

         ForwardFileInUnsafeDirPathSafe
              Allow a .forward file that  is  in  an  unsafe
              directory to include references to program and
              files.

         GroupReadableKeyFile
              Accept a group-readable key file for STARTTLS.

         GroupReadableSASLDBFile
              Accept a group-readable  Cyrus  SASL  password
              file.

         GroupReadableDefaultAuthInfoFile
              Accept  a  group-readable DefaultAuthInfo file
              for SASL.

         GroupWritableAliasFile
              Allow group-writable alias files.

         GroupWritableDirPathSafe
              Change the definition of "unsafe directory" to
              consider   group-writable  directories  to  be
              safe.  World-writable directories  are  always
              unsafe.

         GroupWritableForwardFile
              Allow group writable .forward files.











SMM:08-54          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


         GroupWritableForwardFileSafe
              Accept  group-writable  .forward files as safe
              for program and file delivery.

         GroupWritableIncludeFile
              Allow group wriable :include: files.

         GroupWritableIncludeFileSafe
              Accept group-writable :include: files as  safe
              for program and file delivery.

         GroupWritableSASLDBFile
              Accept  a  group-writable  Cyrus SASL password
              file.

         HelpFileInUnsafeDirPath
              Allow the file named in the HelpFile option to
              be in an unsafe directory.

         IncludeFileInGroupWritableDirPath
              Allow :include: files in group writable direc-
              tories.

         IncludeFileInUnsafeDirPath
              Allow :include: files in unsafe directories.

         IncludeFileInUnsafeDirPathSafe
              Allow a :include: file that is  in  an  unsafe
              directory to include references to program and
              files.

         InsufficientEntropy
              Try to use  STARTTLS  even  if  the  PRNG  for
              OpenSSL  is  not  properly  seeded despite the
              security problems.

         LinkedAliasFileInWritableDir
              Allow an alias  file  that  is  a  link  in  a
              writable directory.

         LinkedClassFileInWritableDir
              Allow  class  files that are links in writable
              directories.

         LinkedForwardFileInWritableDir
              Allow  .forward  files  that  are   links   in
              writable directories.

         LinkedIncludeFileInWritableDir
              Allow   :include:  files  that  are  links  in
              writable directories.












Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-55


         LinkedMapInWritableDir
              Allow map files that  are  links  in  writable
              directories.   This  includes  alias  database
              files.

         LinkedServiceSwitchFileInWritableDir
              Allow the service switch file  to  be  a  link
              even if the directory is writable.

         MapInUnsafeDirPath
              Allow  maps (e.g., hash, btree, and dbm files)
              in unsafe directories.   This  includes  alias
              database files.

         NonRootSafeAddr
              Do  not  mark  file  and program deliveries as
              unsafe if sendmail is not  running  with  root
              privileges.

         RunProgramInUnsafeDirPath
              Run  programs that are in writable directories
              without logging a warning.

         RunWritableProgram
              Run programs that are group- or world-writable
              without logging a warning.

         TrustStickyBit
              Allow  group  or world writable directories if
              the sticky bit is set on  the  directory.   Do
              not set this on systems which do not honor the
              sticky bit on directories.

         WorldWritableAliasFile
              Accept world-writable alias files.

         WorldWritableForwardfile
              Allow world writable .forward files.

         WorldWritableIncludefile
              Allow world wriable :include: files.

         WriteMapToHardLink
              Allow writes to maps that are hard links.

         WriteMapToSymLink
              Allow writes to maps that are symbolic links.

         WriteStatsToHardLink
              Allow the status file to be a hard link.

         WriteStatsToSymLink
              Allow the status file to be a symbolic link.










SMM:08-56          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


   4.10.  Connection Caching

           When processing the queue, sendmail will  try  to
      keep  the  last  few  open  connections  open to avoid
      startup and shutdown costs.  This only applies to  IPC
      and LPC connections.

           When  trying  to  open  a connection the cache is
      first searched.  If an open connection is found, it is
      probed  to see if it is still active by sending a RSET
      command.  It is not an error if this  fails;  instead,
      the connection is closed and reopened.

           Two parameters control the connection cache.  The
      ConnectionCacheSize (k) option defines the  number  of
      simultaneous  open connections that will be permitted.
      If it is set to zero, connections will  be  closed  as
      quickly as possible.  The default is one.  This should
      be set as appropriate for your system  size;  it  will
      limit  the  amount  of  system resources that sendmail
      will use during queue runs.   Never  set  this  higher
      than 4.

           The  ConnectionCacheTimeout  (K) option specifies
      the maximum time that any cached  connection  will  be
      permitted  to  idle.   When the idle time exceeds this
      value the connection is closed.  This number should be
      small (under ten minutes) to prevent you from grabbing
      too many resources from other hosts.  The  default  is
      five minutes.

   4.11.  Name Server Access

           Control  of  host  address  lookups is set by the
      hosts service entry in your service switch  file.   If
      you  are  on a system that has built-in service switch
      support (e.g., Ultrix, Solaris,  or  DEC  OSF/1)  then
      your  system  is probably configured properly already.
      Otherwise,   sendmail   will    consult    the    file
      /etc/mail/service.switch,  which  should  be  created.
      Sendmail only uses two  entries:  hosts  and  aliases,
      although   system  routines  may  use  other  services
      (notably the passwd service for user name  lookups  by
      getpwname).

           However, some systems (such as SunOS 4.X) will do
      DNS lookups regardless of the setting of  the  service
      switch entry.  In particular, the system routine geth-
      ostbyname(3) is used to look up host names,  and  many
      vendor  versions try some combination of DNS, NIS, and
      file lookup in /etc/hosts without consulting a service
      switch.  Sendmail makes no attempt to work around this
      problem, and the DNS lookup will be done  anyway.   If










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-57


      you  do  not have a nameserver configured at all, such
      as at a UUCP-only site, sendmail will get  a  "connec-
      tion  refused" message when it tries to connect to the
      name server.  If the hosts switch entry has  the  ser-
      vice "dns" listed somewhere in the list, sendmail will
      interpret this to mean a temporary  failure  and  will
      queue  the  mail  for  later processing; otherwise, it
      ignores the name server data.

           The same technique is used to decide  whether  to
      do  MX lookups.  If you want MX support, you must have
      "dns" listed as a service in the hosts switch entry.

           The ResolverOptions  (I)  option  allows  you  to
      tweak  name  server options.  The command line takes a
      series of flags as documented in resolver(3) (with the
      leading  "RES_"  deleted).  Each can be preceded by an
      optional `+' or `-'.  For example, the line


          O ResolverOptions=+AAONLY -DNSRCH

      turns on  the  AAONLY  (accept  authoritative  answers
      only)  and  turns  off  the  DNSRCH (search the domain
      path)  options.   Most  resolver   libraries   default
      DNSRCH,  DEFNAMES, and RECURSE flags on and all others
      off.  If NETINET6 is enabled, most  libraries  default
      to  USE_INET6 as well.  You can also include "HasWild-
      cardMX" to specify that there is a wildcard MX  record
      matching  your domain; this turns off MX matching when
      canonifying names, which  can  lead  to  inappropriate
      canonifications.    Use   "WorkAroundBrokenAAAA"  when
      faced with a broken nameserver that  returns  SERVFAIL
      (a  temporary failure) on T_AAAA (IPv6) lookups during
      hostname canonification.  Notice: it might  be  neces-
      sary  to  apply  the same (or similar) options to sub-
      mit.cf too.

           Version level 1 configurations (see  the  section
      about ``Configuration Version Level'') turn DNSRCH and
      DEFNAMES off when doing delivery  lookups,  but  leave
      them  on  everywhere  else.   Version  8  of  sendmail
      ignores them when doing canonification  lookups  (that
      is, when using $[ ... $]), and always does the search.
      If you don't want  to  do  automatic  name  extension,
      don't call $[ ... $].

           The  search rules for $[ ... $] are somewhat dif-
      ferent than usual.  If the name being looked up has at
      least  one  dot,  it  always tries the unmodified name
      first.  If that fails, it  tries  the  reduced  search
      path,  and  lastly tries the unmodified name (but only
      for names without a dot, since names with a  dot  have










SMM:08-58          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


      already  been  tried).   This  allows  names  such  as
      ``utc.CS'' to match the site in Czechoslovakia  rather
      than  the  site in your local Computer Science depart-
      ment.  It also prefers A and  CNAME  records  over  MX
      records  -- that is, if it finds an MX record it makes
      note of it, but keeps looking.  This way, if you  have
      a wildcard MX record matching your domain, it will not
      assume that all names match.

           To completely turn off all name server access  on
      systems  without service switch support (such as SunOS
      4.X) you will have to  recompile  with  -DNAMED_BIND=0
      and  remove  -lresolv from the list of libraries to be
      searched when linking.

   4.12.  Moving the Per-User Forward Files

           Some sites mount each user's home directory  from
      a  local  disk  on  their  workstation,  so that local
      access is fast.  However, the result is that  .forward
      file  lookups from a central mail server are slow.  In
      some cases, mail can even  be  delivered  on  machines
      inappropriately  because  of a file server being down.
      The performance can be especially bad if you  run  the
      automounter.

           The  ForwardPath  (J)  option allows you to set a
      path of forward files.  For example, the  config  file
      line


          O ForwardPath=/var/forward/$u:$z/.forward.$w

      would  first look for a file with the same name as the
      user's login in /var/forward; if that is not found (or
      is  inaccessible) the file ``.forward.machinename'' in
      the user's home directory is searched.  A  truly  per-
      verse  site  could  also search by sender by using $r,
      $s, or $f.

           If you create a directory such  as  /var/forward,
      it should be mode 1777 (that is, the sticky bit should
      be set).  Users should create  the  files  mode  0644.
      Note  that you must use the ForwardFileInUnsafeDirPath
      and  ForwardFileInUnsafeDirPathSafe  flags  with   the
      DontBlameSendmail  option  to allow forward files in a
      world writable directory.  This might also be used  as
      a denial of service attack (users could create forward
      files for other users); a better approach might be  to
      create  /var/forward  mode 0755 and create empty files
      for each user, owned by that user, mode 0644.  If  you
      do  this,  you don't have to set the DontBlameSendmail
      options indicated above.










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-59


   4.13.  Free Space

           On systems that have one of the system  calls  in
      the  statfs(2)  family  (including statvfs and ustat),
      you can specify a minimum number of free blocks on the
      queue  filesystem  using the MinFreeBlocks (b) option.
      If there are fewer than the indicated number of blocks
      free  on  the filesystem on which the queue is mounted
      the SMTP server will reject mail with  the  452  error
      code.   This  invites  the  SMTP  client  to try again
      later.

           Beware of setting this option too  high;  it  can
      cause  rejection of email when that mail would be pro-
      cessed without difficulty.

   4.14.  Maximum Message Size

           To avoid overflowing your  system  with  a  large
      message,  the  MaxMessageSize option can be set to set
      an absolute limit on the  size  of  any  one  message.
      This  will  be  advertised  in  the ESMTP dialogue and
      checked during message collection.

   4.15.  Privacy Flags

           The PrivacyOptions (p) option allows you  to  set
      certain  ``privacy''  flags.   Actually,  many of them
      don't give you any extra privacy, rather just  insist-
      ing  that  client  SMTP  servers  use the HELO command
      before using certain commands or adding extra  headers
      to indicate possible spoof attempts.

           The  option  takes  a  series  of flag names; the
      final privacy is the inclusive or of those flags.  For
      example:


          O PrivacyOptions=needmailhelo, noexpn

      insists that the HELO or EHLO command be used before a
      MAIL command is accepted and disables  the  EXPN  com-
      mand.

           The flags are detailed in section 5.6.

   4.16.  Send to Me Too

           Beginning with version 8.10, sendmail includes by
      default the (envelope) sender in any list  expansions.
      For  example,  if "matt" sends to a list that contains
      "matt" as one of the members he will get a copy of the
      message.   If the MeToo option is set to FALSE (in the










SMM:08-60          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


      configuration file or  via  the  command  line),  this
      behavior  is  changed,  i.e., the (envelope) sender is
      excluded in list expansions.

5.  THE WHOLE SCOOP ON THE CONFIGURATION FILE

        This section describes  the  configuration  file  in
   detail.

        There is one point that should be made clear immedi-
   ately: the syntax of the configuration file  is  designed
   to  be reasonably easy to parse, since this is done every
   time sendmail starts up, rather than easy for a human  to
   read  or  write.  The configuration file should be gener-
   ated via the method described in cf/README, it should not
   be  edited  directly  unless someone is familiar with the
   internals of the syntax described here and it is not pos-
   sible  to  achieve  the  desired  result  via the default
   method.

        The configuration file is organized as a  series  of
   lines,  each  of  which  begins  with  a single character
   defining the semantics for the rest of the  line.   Lines
   beginning  with  a  space or a tab are continuation lines
   (although the semantics are  not  well  defined  in  many
   places).   Blank  lines  and lines beginning with a sharp
   symbol (`#') are comments.

   5.1.  R and S -- Rewriting Rules

           The core of address  parsing  are  the  rewriting
      rules.  These are an ordered production system.  Send-
      mail scans through the set of rewriting rules  looking
      for  a  match on the left hand side (LHS) of the rule.
      When a rule matches, the address is  replaced  by  the
      right hand side (RHS) of the rule.

           There  are several sets of rewriting rules.  Some
      of the rewriting sets are  used  internally  and  must
      have  specific semantics.  Other rewriting sets do not
      have specifically assigned semantics, and may be  ref-
      erenced  by the mailer definitions or by other rewrit-
      ing sets.

           The syntax of these two commands are:


          Sn

      Sets the current ruleset being collected to n.  If you
      begin  a  ruleset more than once it appends to the old
      definition.











Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-61


          Rlhs rhs comments

      The fields must be separated by at least one tab char-
      acter;  there  may  be  embedded spaces in the fields.
      The lhs is a pattern that is applied to the input.  If
      it  matches,  the  input is rewritten to the rhs.  The
      comments are ignored.

           Macro expansions of the  form  $x  are  performed
      when  the configuration file is read.  A literal $ can
      be included using $$.  Expansions of the form $&x  are
      performed  at  run  time using a somewhat less general
      algorithm.  This  is  intended  only  for  referencing
      internally  defined macros such as $h that are changed
      at runtime.

      5.1.1.  The left hand side

              The left hand side of rewriting rules contains
         a   pattern.    Normal  words  are  simply  matched
         directly.  Metasyntax is introduced using a  dollar
         sign.  The metasymbols are:


             $*   Match zero or more tokens
             $+   Match one or more tokens
             $-   Match exactly one token
             $=x  Match any phrase in class x
             $~x  Match any word not in class x

         If  any  of  these  match, they are assigned to the
         symbol $n for replacement on the right  hand  side,
         where  n  is the index in the LHS.  For example, if
         the LHS:


             $-:$+

         is applied to the input:


             UCBARPA:eric

         the rule will match, and the values passed  to  the
         RHS will be:


             $1  UCBARPA
             $2  eric


              Additionally,  the LHS can include $@ to match
         zero tokens.  This is not bound to a $n on the RHS,










SMM:08-62          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


         and  is  normally only used when it stands alone in
         order to match the null input.

      5.1.2.  The right hand side

              When the left hand side of  a  rewriting  rule
         matches,  the  input is deleted and replaced by the
         right hand side.  Tokens are copied  directly  from
         the  RHS  unless  they  begin  with  a dollar sign.
         Metasymbols are:


             $n         Substitute indefinite token n from LHS
             $[name$]   Canonicalize name
             $(map key $@arguments $:default $)
                        Generalized keyed mapping function
             $>n        "Call" ruleset n
             $#mailer   Resolve to mailer
             $@host     Specify host
             $:user     Specify user


              The $n syntax  substitutes  the  corresponding
         value  from  a  $+,  $-, $*, $=, or $~ match on the
         LHS.  It may be used anywhere.

              A host name enclosed  between  $[  and  $]  is
         looked  up  in the host database(s) and replaced by
         the  canonical  name[14].   For  example, "$[ftp$]"
         might     become     "ftp.CS.Berkeley.EDU"      and
         "$[[128.32.130.2]$]"     would     become     "van-
         gogh.CS.Berkeley.EDU."   Sendmail  recognizes   its
         numeric  IP address without calling the name server
         and replaces it with its canonical name.

              The $( ...  $) syntax is a more  general  form
         of  lookup;  it  uses  a  named  map  instead of an
         implicit map.  If no lookup is found, the indicated
         default is inserted; if no default is specified and
         no lookup matches, the  value  is  left  unchanged.
         The  arguments  are  passed to the map for possible
         use.

              The $>n syntax causes  the  remainder  of  the
         line  to be substituted as usual and then passed as
         the argument to ruleset  n.   The  final  value  of
         ruleset  n  then  becomes the substitution for this
         rule.  The $> syntax expands everything  after  the
____________________
   [14]This is  actually  completely  equivalent  to  $(host
hostname$).  In particular, a $: default can be used.












Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-63


         ruleset  name  to the end of the replacement string
         and then passes that as the initial  input  to  the
         ruleset.   Recursive  calls are allowed.  For exam-
         ple,


             $>0 $>3 $1

         expands $1, passes that  to  ruleset  3,  and  then
         passes the result of ruleset 3 to ruleset 0.

              The  $#  syntax should only be used in ruleset
         zero, a subroutine of  ruleset  zero,  or  rulesets
         that   return  decisions  (e.g.,  check_rcpt).   It
         causes evaluation of the ruleset to terminate imme-
         diately,  and  signals to sendmail that the address
         has completely resolved.  The complete  syntax  for
         ruleset 0 is:


             $#mailer $@host $:user

         This  specifies  the  {mailer,  host, user} 3-tuple
         necessary to direct the mailer.   Note:  the  third
         element ( user ) is often also called address part.
         If the mailer is local the host part may  be  omit-
         ted[15].  The mailer must be a single word, but the
         host  and user may be multi-part.  If the mailer is
         the built-in IPC mailer, the host may be  a  colon-
         separated  list of hosts that are searched in order
         for the first  working  address  (exactly  like  MX
         records).   The  user  is  later  rewritten  by the
         mailer-specific envelope rewriting set and assigned
         to  the $u macro.  As a special case, if the mailer
         specified has the F=@ flag specified and the  first
         character  of  the  $:  value  is  "@",  the "@" is
         stripped off, and a flag  is  set  in  the  address
         descriptor that causes sendmail to not do ruleset 5
         processing.

              Normally, a rule that matches is retried, that
         is,  the rule loops until it fails.  A RHS may also
         be preceded by a $@ or a $: to change  this  behav-
         ior.  A $@ prefix causes the ruleset to return with
         the remainder of the RHS as the value.  A $: prefix
         causes  the  rule to terminate immediately, but the
____________________
   [15]You  may want to use it for special "per user" exten-
sions.  For example, in the address  "jgm+foo@CMU.EDU";  the
"+foo"  part  is not part of the user name, and is passed to
the local mailer for local use.












SMM:08-64          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


         ruleset to continue; this can be used to avoid con-
         tinued  application  of  a  rule.   The  prefix  is
         stripped before continuing.

              The $@ and $: prefixes may precede a $>  spec;
         for example:


             R$+     $: $>7 $1

         matches anything, passes that to ruleset seven, and
         continues; the $: is necessary to avoid an infinite
         loop.

              Substitution  occurs  in  the order described,
         that is, parameters from the LHS  are  substituted,
         hostnames   are  canonicalized,  "subroutines"  are
         called, and finally $#, $@, and $: are processed.

      5.1.3.  Semantics of rewriting rule sets

              There are six rewriting sets  that  have  spe-
         cific  semantics.   Five  of  these  are related as
         depicted by figure 1.

              Ruleset three should  turn  the  address  into
         "canonical  form."  This form should have the basic
         syntax:



____________________________________________________________

                    +---+
                 -->| 0 |-->resolved address
                /   +---+
               /            +---+   +---+
              /        ---->| 1 |-->| S |--
       +---+ / +---+  /     +---+   +---+  \    +---+
addr-->| 3 |-->| D |--                      --->| 4 |-->msg
       +---+   +---+  \     +---+   +---+  /    +---+
                        --->| 2 |-->| R |--
                            +---+   +---+

            Figure 1 -- Rewriting set semantics
          D -- sender domain addition
          S -- mailer-specific sender rewriting
          R -- mailer-specific recipient rewriting
____________________________________________________________














Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-65


             local-part@host-domain-spec

         Ruleset three is applied by sendmail  before  doing
         anything with any address.

              If  no  "@"  sign is specified, then the host-
         domain-spec may be appended (box "D" in  Figure  1)
         from  the  sender  address (if the C flag is set in
         the mailer definition corresponding to the  sending
         mailer).

              Ruleset zero is applied after ruleset three to
         addresses that are going to actually specify recip-
         ients.    It  must  resolve  to  a  {mailer,  host,
         address} triple.  The mailer must be defined in the
         mailer  definitions  from  the  configuration file.
         The host is defined into the $h macro  for  use  in
         the   argv   expansion  of  the  specified  mailer.
         Notice: since the envelope sender address  will  be
         used  if  a  delivery  status  notification must be
         send, i.e., is may specify a recipient, it is  also
         run  through ruleset zero.  If ruleset zero returns
         a temporary error 4xy then  delivery  is  deferred.
         This  can  be used to temporarily disable delivery,
         e.g., based on the time of the day or other varying
         parameters.  It should not be used to quarantine e-
         mails.

              Rulesets one and two are applied to all sender
         and  recipient  addresses  respectively.   They are
         applied before any specification in the mailer def-
         inition.  They must never resolve.

              Ruleset  four  is  applied to all addresses in
         the message.  It is  typically  used  to  translate
         internal to external form.

              In addition, ruleset 5 is applied to all local
         addresses (specifically, those that  resolve  to  a
         mailer  with  the  `F=5' flag set) that do not have
         aliases.  This allows a last minute hook for  local
         names.

      5.1.4.  Ruleset hooks

              A  few  extra  rulesets are defined as "hooks"
         that can be defined to get special features.   They
         are  all  named  rulesets.  The "check_*" forms all
         give accept/reject status; falling off the  end  or
         returning  normally  is an accept, and resolving to
         $#error is a reject or quarantine.  Quarantining is
         chosen  by specifying quarantine in the second part
         of the mailer triplet:










SMM:08-66          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


             $#error $@ quarantine $: Reason for quarantine

         Many of these  can  also  resolve  to  the  special
         mailer  name $#discard; this accepts the message as
         though it were  successful  but  then  discards  it
         without delivery.  Note, this mailer cannot be cho-
         sen as a mailer in ruleset 0.  Note also  that  all
         "check_*"  rulesets  have  to  deal  with temporary
         failures, especially for map  lookups,  themselves,
         i.e.,  they should return a temporary error code or
         at least they should  make  a  proper  decision  in
         those cases.

         5.1.4.1.  check_relay

                 The  check_relay  ruleset is called after a
            connection is accepted by the daemon.  It is not
            called  when  sendmail  is started using the -bs
            option.  It is passed


                client.host.name $| client.host.address

            where $| is a metacharacter separating  the  two
            parts.  This ruleset can reject connections from
            various locations.  Note that it only checks the
            connecting  SMTP client IP address and hostname.
            It does not check for third party message relay-
            ing.   The  check_rcpt  ruleset  discussed below
            usually does third party message relay checking.

         5.1.4.2.  check_mail

                 The check_mail ruleset is passed  the  user
            name parameter of the SMTP MAIL command.  It can
            accept or reject the address.

         5.1.4.3.  check_rcpt

                 The check_rcpt ruleset is passed  the  user
            name parameter of the SMTP RCPT command.  It can
            accept or reject the address.

         5.1.4.4.  check_data

                 The check_data ruleset is called after  the
            SMTP  DATA  command, its parameter is the number
            of recipients.  It can accept or reject the com-
            mand.














Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-67


         5.1.4.5.  check_compat

                 The check_compat ruleset is passed


                sender-address $| recipient-address

            where  $|  is  a  metacharacter  separating  the
            addresses.  It can accept or reject mail  trans-
            fer  between  these  two addresses much like the
            checkcompat()  function.   Note:   while   other
            check_*  rulesets  are  invoked  during the SMTP
            mail  receiption  stage  (i.e.,  in   the   SMTP
            server), check_compat is invoked during the mail
            delivery stage.

         5.1.4.6.  check_eoh

                 The check_eoh ruleset is passed


                number-of-headers $| size-of-headers

            where $| is a metacharacter separating the  num-
            bers.   These  numbers can be used for size com-
            parisons with the arith  map.   The  ruleset  is
            triggered  after  all  of  the headers have been
            read.  It can be used to  correlate  information
            gathered  from  those  headers  using  the macro
            storage map.  One possible use is to check for a
            missing header.  For example:
































SMM:08-68          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


                Kstorage macro
                HMessage-Id: $>CheckMessageId

                SCheckMessageId
                # Record the presence of the header
                R$*            $: $(storage {MessageIdCheck} $@ OK $) $1
                R< $+ @ $+ >   $@ OK
                R$*            $#error $: 553 Header Error

                Scheck_eoh
                # Check the macro
                R$*            $: < $&{MessageIdCheck} >
                # Clear the macro for the next message
                R$*            $: $(storage {MessageIdCheck} $) $1
                # Has a Message-Id: header
                R< $+ >        $@ OK
                # Allow missing Message-Id: from local mail
                R$*            $: < $&{client_name} >
                R< >           $@ OK
                R< $=w >       $@ OK
                # Otherwise, reject the mail
                R$*            $#error $: 553 Header Error

            Keep  in  mind  the  Message-Id: header is not a
            required header and is  not  a  guaranteed  spam
            indicator.   This  ruleset  is  an  example  and
            should probably not be used in production.

         5.1.4.7.  check_eom

                 The check_eom ruleset is called  after  the
            end  of  a message, its parameter is the message
            size.  It can accept or reject the message.

         5.1.4.8.  check_etrn

                 The check_etrn ruleset is passed the param-
            eter of the SMTP ETRN command.  It can accept or
            reject the command.

         5.1.4.9.  check_expn

                 The check_expn ruleset is passed  the  user
            name parameter of the SMTP EXPN command.  It can
            accept or reject the address.

         5.1.4.10.  check_vrfy

                 The check_vrfy ruleset is passed  the  user
            name parameter of the SMTP VRFY command.  It can
            accept or reject the command.












Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-69


         5.1.4.11.  trust_auth

                 The trust_auth ruleset is passed the  AUTH=
            parameter  of the SMTP MAIL command.  It is used
            to  determine  whether  this  value  should   be
            trusted.  In  order  to  make this decision, the
            ruleset may make use of  the  various  ${auth_*}
            macros.   If  the  ruleset  does  resolve to the
            "error"  mailer  the  AUTH=  parameter  is   not
            trusted  and  hence  not  passed  on to the next
            relay.

         5.1.4.12.  tls_client

                 The tls_client ruleset is called when send-
            mail  acts  as  server, after a STARTTLS command
            has  been  issued,  and  from  check_mail.   The
            parameter is the value of ${verify} and STARTTLS
            or MAIL,  respectively.   If  the  ruleset  does
            resolve  to  the "error" mailer, the appropriate
            error code is returned to the client.

         5.1.4.13.  tls_server

                 The tls_server ruleset is called when send-
            mail  acts  as  client  after a STARTTLS command
            (should) have been issued.  The parameter is the
            value of ${verify}.  If the ruleset does resolve
            to the "error" mailer, the connection is aborted
            (treated  as non-deliverable with a permanent or
            temporary error).

         5.1.4.14.  tls_rcpt

                 The tls_rcpt ruleset is  called  each  time
            before a RCPT TO command is sent.  The parameter
            is the current recipient.  If the  ruleset  does
            resolve  to the "error" mailer, the RCPT TO com-
            mand is suppressed (treated  as  non-deliverable
            with  a  permanent  or  temporary  error).  This
            ruleset allows to require encryption or  verifi-
            cation  of  the recipient's MTA even if the mail
            is somehow  redirected  to  another  host.   For
            example,  sending  mail  to luke@endmail.org may
            get redirected to a host  named  death.star  and
            hence  the  tls_server  ruleset won't apply.  By
            introducing  per  recipient  restrictions   such
            attacks  (e.g.,  via  DNS  spoofing) can be made
            impossible.  See cf/README how this ruleset  can
            be used.













SMM:08-70          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


         5.1.4.15.  srv_features

                 The srv_features ruleset is called with the
            connecting client's host name when a client con-
            nects  to  sendmail.  This ruleset should return
            $# followed by a list of options (single charac-
            ters  delimited  by white space).  If the return
            value starts with anything else it  is  silently
            ignored.   Generally  upper case characters turn
            off a feature while lower case  characters  turn
            it  on.   Option  `S'  causes  the server not to
            offer STARTTLS, which is useful to interact with
            MTAs/MUAs  that have broken STARTTLS implementa-
            tions by simply not offering it.  `V' turns  off
            the  request for a client certificate during the
            TLS handshake.  Options  `A'  and  `P'  suppress
            SMTP  AUTH and PIPELINING, respectively.  `c' is
            the  equivalent  to  AuthOptions=p,   i.e.,   it
            doesn't  permit mechanisms susceptible to simple
            passive attack (e.g., PLAIN,  LOGIN),  unless  a
            security  layer  is active.  Option `l' requires
            SMTP AUTH for a connection.  Options  'B',  'D',
            'E',  and 'X' suppress SMTP VERB, DSN, ETRN, and
            EXPN, respectively.


                A        Do not offer AUTH
                a        Offer AUTH (default)
                B        Do not offer VERB
                b        Offer VERB (default)
                C        Do not require security layer for
                         plaintext AUTH (default)
                c        Require security layer for plaintext AUTH
                D        Do not offer DSN
                d        Offer DSN (default)
                E        Do not offer ETRN
                e        Offer ETRN (default)
                L        Do not require AUTH (default)
                l        Require AUTH
                P        Do not offer PIPELINING
                p        Offer PIPELINING (default)
                S        Do not offer STARTTLS
                s        Offer STARTTLS (default)
                V        Do not request a client certificate
                v        Request a client certificate (default)
                X        Do not offer EXPN
                x        Offer EXPN (default)

            Note: the entries marked  as  ``(default)''  may
            require  that  some configuration has been made,
            e.g., SMTP AUTH is only  available  if  properly
            configured.    Moreover,  many  options  can  be
            changed on a global basis via other settings  as










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-71


            explained in this document, e.g., via DaemonPor-
            tOptions.

                 The ruleset may return `$#temp' to indicate
            that  there  is  a temporary problem determining
            the correct features, e.g., if a map is unavail-
            able.   In  that  case, the SMTP server issues a
            temporary failure and does not accept email.

         5.1.4.16.  try_tls

                 The try_tls ruleset is called when sendmail
            connects  to  another  MTA.  If the ruleset does
            resolve to the "error" mailer, sendmail does not
            try  STARTTLS  even  if  it is offered.  This is
            useful to deal  with  STARTTLS  interoperability
            issues by simply not using it.

         5.1.4.17.  tls_srv_features and tls_clt_features

                 The tls_clt_features ruleset is called when
            sendmail  connects  to  another  MTA   and   the
            tls_srv_features ruleset is called when a client
            connects to sendmail.   The  arguments  for  the
            rulesets are the host name and IP address of the
            other side separated by $| (which is a metachar-
            acter).   They should return a list of key=value
            pairs separated by semicolons; the list  can  be
            empty  if  no  options  should be applied to the
            connection.   Available  keys  are   and   their
            allowed values are:

            Options
              A comma separated list of SSL related options.
              See ServerSSLOptions and ClientSSLOptions  for
              details,  as  well  as  SSL_set_options(3) and
              note this warning: Options already set  before
              are not cleared!

            CipherList
              Specify   cipher   list   for   STARTTLS,  see
              ciphers(1) for possible  values.   This  over-
              rides the global CipherList for the session.

            CertFile
              File containing a certificate.

            KeyFile
              File  containing  the private key for the cer-
              tificate.

            Example:











SMM:08-72          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


                Stls_srv_features
                R$* $| 10.$+   $: cipherlist=HIGH


            Notes:

                 Errors in  these  features  (e.g.,  unknown
            keys  or invalid values) are logged and the cur-
            rent session is aborted to avoid using  STARTTLS
            with features that should have been changed.

                 The keys are case-insensitive.

                 Both CertFile and KeyFile must be specified
            together; specifying only one is an error.

                 These rulesets require the sendmail  binary
            to  be  built with _FFR_TLS_SE_OPTS enabled (see
            the "For Future Release" section).

         5.1.4.18.  authinfo

                 The authinfo ruleset is called  when  send-
            mail  tries  to authenticate to another MTA.  It
            should return $# followed by a  list  of  tokens
            that  are  used  for  SMTP  AUTH.  If the return
            value starts with anything else it  is  silently
            ignored.   Each  token is a tagged string of the
            form: "TDstring" (including the quotes), where


                T        Tag which describes the item
                D        Delimiter: ':' simple text follows
                         '=' string is base64 encoded
                string   Value of the item

            Valid values for the tag are:


                U        user (authorization) id
                I        authentication id
                P        password
                R        realm
                M        list of mechanisms delimited by spaces

            If this ruleset is defined, the option  Default-
            AuthInfo  is  ignored  (even if the ruleset does
            not return a ``useful'' result).

         5.1.4.19.  queuegroup

                 The queuegroup ruleset is  used  to  map  a
            recipient  address  to  a queue group name.  The










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-73


            input for the ruleset is a recipient address  as
            specified by the SMTP RCPT command.  The ruleset
            should return $# followed by the name of a queue
            group.  If the return value starts with anything
            else it is silently ignored.   See  the  section
            about ``Queue Groups and Queue Directories'' for
            further information.

         5.1.4.20.  greet_pause

                 The greet_pause ruleset is used to  specify
            the  amount  of time to pause before sending the
            initial SMTP 220 greeting.  If  any  traffic  is
            received  during  that pause, an SMTP 554 rejec-
            tion response is given instead of the 220 greet-
            ing  and  all  SMTP commands are rejected during
            that connection.  This helps protect sites  from
            open  proxies  and  SMTP  slammers.  The ruleset
            should return $# followed by the number of  mil-
            liseconds  (thousandths  of  a second) to pause.
            If the return value starts with anything else or
            is  not a number, it is silently ignored.  Note:
            this ruleset is not invoked (and hence the  fea-
            ture is disabled) when the smtps (SMTP over SSL)
            is used, i.e., the s modifier  is  set  for  the
            daemon  via  DaemonPortOptions,  because in this
            case the SSL handshake is performed  before  the
            greeting is sent.

      5.1.5.  IPC mailers

              Some  special processing occurs if the ruleset
         zero resolves to an IPC mailer (that is,  a  mailer
         that  has  "[IPC]" listed as the Path in the M con-
         figuration line.  The host name passed  after  "$@"
         has  MX expansion performed if not delivering via a
         named socket; this looks the name up in DNS to find
         alternate delivery sites.

              The host name can also be provided as a dotted
         quad or an IPv6 address  in  square  brackets;  for
         example:


             [128.32.149.78]

         or


             [IPv6:2002:c0a8:51d2::23f4]

         This  causes direct conversion of the numeric value
         to an IP host address.










SMM:08-74          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


              The host name passed in  after  the  "$@"  may
         also  be  a colon-separated list of hosts.  Each is
         separately MX expanded and the results are concate-
         nated  to make (essentially) one long MX list.  The
         intent here is to create "fake" MX records that are
         not published in DNS for private internal networks.

              As  a final special case, the host name can be
         passed in as a text string in square brackets:


             [ucbvax.berkeley.edu]

         This form avoids the MX  mapping.   N.B.:  This  is
         intended  only for situations where you have a net-
         work firewall or other host that  will  do  special
         processing  for  all  your  mail,  so  that your MX
         record points to a gateway  machine;  this  machine
         could  then  do  direct delivery to machines within
         your local domain.  Use of  this  feature  directly
         violates  RFC  1123 section 5.3.5: it should not be
         used lightly.

   5.2.  D -- Define Macro

           Macros are named with a single character or  with
      a  word  in  {braces}.   The  names  ``x'' and ``{x}''
      denote the  same  macro  for  every  single  character
      ``x''.   Single  character  names may be selected from
      the entire ASCII set, but user-defined  macros  should
      be  selected  from the set of upper case letters only.
      Lower case letters and special symbols are used inter-
      nally.   Long names beginning with a lower case letter
      or a punctuation character are  reserved  for  use  by
      sendmail,  so  user-defined  long  macro  names should
      begin with an upper case letter.

           The syntax for macro definitions is:


          Dxval

      where x is the name of the macro (which may be a  sin-
      gle  character  or  a  word  in braces) and val is the
      value it should have.  There should be no spaces given
      that do not actually belong in the macro value.

           Macros  are  interpolated using the construct $x,
      where x is the name of the macro to  be  interpolated.
      This interpolation is done when the configuration file
      is read, except in M lines.  The special construct $&x
      can be used in R lines to get deferred interpolation.











Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-75


           Conditionals can be specified using the syntax:


          $?x text1 $| text2 $.

      This  interpolates  text1  if  the macro $x is set and
      non-null, and text2 otherwise.  The "else" ($|) clause
      may be omitted.

           The  following  macros  are  defined  and/or used
      internally by sendmail for interpolation  into  argv's
      for  mailers or for other contexts.  The ones marked *
      are information passed  into  sendmail[16],  the  ones
      marked  #  are  information  passed both in and out of
      sendmail, and the unmarked macros are  passed  out  of
      sendmail but are not otherwise used internally.  These
      macros are:

      $a   The origination date in RFC 822 format.  This  is
           extracted from the Date: line.

      $b   The current date in RFC 822 format.

      $c   The  hop count.  This is a count of the number of
           Received: lines plus the value of the -h  command
           line flag.

      $d   The current date in UNIX (ctime) format.

      $e*  (Obsolete;    use    SmtpGreetingMessage   option
           instead.)   The  SMTP  entry  message.   This  is
           printed  out when SMTP starts up.  The first word
           must be the $j macro as  specified  by  RFC  821.
           Defaults  to  "$j Sendmail $v ready at $b".  Com-
           monly redefined to include the configuration ver-
           sion  number,  e.g.,  "$j Sendmail $v/$Z ready at
           $b"

      $f   The envelope sender (from) address.

      $g   The sender address  relative  to  the  recipient.
           For   example,   if  $f  is  "foo",  $g  will  be
           "host!foo",  "foo@host.domain",  or  whatever  is
           appropriate for the receiving mailer.

      $h   The  recipient  host.   This  is set in ruleset 0
           from the $@ field of a parsed address.
____________________
   [16]As of version 8.6, all of these macros  have  reason-
able  defaults.  Previous versions required that they be de-
fined.












SMM:08-76          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


      $i   The queue id, e.g., "f344MXxp018717".

      $j#  The "official" domain name for this  site.   This
           is  fully qualified if the full qualification can
           be found.  It must be redefined to be  the  fully
           qualified  domain name if your system is not con-
           figured so that information can find it automati-
           cally.

      $k   The UUCP node name (from the uname system call).

      $l*  (Obsolete; use UnixFromLine option instead.)  The
           format of the UNIX from line.   Unless  you  have
           changed  the  UNIX mailbox format, you should not
           change the default, which is "From $g $d".

      $m   The domain part of the gethostname return  value.
           Under  normal  circumstances, $j is equivalent to
           $w.$m.

      $n*  The name of  the  daemon  (for  error  messages).
           Defaults to "MAILER-DAEMON".

      $o*  (Obsolete:  use  OperatorChars  option  instead.)
           The set of "operators" in addresses.  A  list  of
           characters  which  will  be considered tokens and
           which will separate tokens  when  doing  parsing.
           For  example,  if  "@" were in the $o macro, then
           the input "a@b" would be scanned as three tokens:
           "a," "@," and "b."  Defaults to ".:@[]", which is
           the minimum set necessary to do RFC 822  parsing;
           a  richer  set  of operators is ".:%@!/[]", which
           adds support for  UUCP,  the  %-hack,  and  X.400
           addresses.

      $p   Sendmail's process id.

      $q*  Default  format  of sender address.  The $q macro
           specifies how an address should appear in a  mes-
           sage  when  it is defaulted.  Defaults to "<$g>".
           It is commonly redefined to be "$?x$x <$g>$|$g$."
           or "$g$?x ($x)$.", corresponding to the following
           two formats:


               Eric Allman <eric@CS.Berkeley.EDU>
               eric@CS.Berkeley.EDU (Eric Allman)

           Sendmail properly quotes names that have  special
           characters if the first form is used.

      $r   Protocol  used  to receive the message.  Set from
           the -p command line flag or by  the  SMTP  server










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-77


           code.

      $s   Sender's host name.  Set from the -p command line
           flag or by the SMTP server code (in which case it
           is set to the EHLO/HELO parameter).

      $t   A  numeric  representation of the current time in
           the format YYYYMMDDHHmm (4 digit year  1900-9999,
           2  digit  month 01-12, 2 digit day 01-31, 2 digit
           hours 00-23, 2 digit minutes 00-59).

      $u   The recipient user.

      $v   The version number of the sendmail binary.

      $w#  The hostname of this site.  This is the root name
           of this host (but see below for caveats).

      $x   The full name of the sender.

      $z   The home directory of the recipient.

      $_   The   validated   sender   address.    See   also
           ${client_resolve}.

      ${addr_type}
           The type of the address which is currently  being
           rewritten.  This macro contains up to three char-
           acters, the first is either `e' or `h' for  enve-
           lope/header  address,  the second is a space, and
           the third is either `s' or `r' for sender/recipi-
           ent address.

      ${alg_bits}
           The  maximum keylength (in bits) of the symmetric
           encryption algorithm used for a  TLS  connection.
           This  may  be  less than the effective keylength,
           which is stored in ${cipher_bits},  for  ``export
           controlled'' algorithms.

      ${auth_authen}
           The client's authentication credentials as deter-
           mined by authentication (only set if successful).
           The  format  depends  on  the  mechanism used, it
           might be just `user', or `user@realm',  or  some-
           thing similar (SMTP AUTH only).

      ${auth_author}
           The authorization identity, i.e. the AUTH= param-
           eter of the SMTP MAIL command if supplied.

      ${auth_type}
           The mechanism used for SMTP authentication  (only










SMM:08-78          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


           set if successful).

      ${auth_ssf}
           The  keylength (in bits) of the symmetric encryp-
           tion algorithm used for the security layer  of  a
           SASL mechanism.

      ${bodytype}
           The  message  body  type  (7BIT  or 8BITMIME), as
           determined from the envelope.

      ${cert_fp}
           The  fingerprint  of  the  presented  certificate
           (STARTTLS   only).   Note:  this  macro  is  only
           defined if the option CertFingerprintAlgorithm is
           set,  in  which  case  the  specified fingerprint
           algorithm is used.  The valid  algorithms  depend
           on  the  OpenSSL  version, but usually md5, sha1,
           and sha256 are available.  See


               openssl dgst -h

           for a list.

      ${cert_issuer}
           The DN (distinguished name) of the  CA  (certifi-
           cate  authority)  that  signed the presented cer-
           tificate (the cert issuer) (STARTTLS only).

      ${cert_md5}
           The MD5 hash of the presented certificate (START-
           TLS  only).   Note: this macro is only defined if
           the option CertFingerprintAlgorithm is not set.

      ${cert_subject}
           The DN of the presented certificate  (called  the
           cert subject) (STARTTLS only).

      ${cipher}
           The  cipher  suite used for the connection, e.g.,
           EDH-DSS-DES-CBC3-SHA,  EDH-RSA-DES-CBC-SHA,  DES-
           CBC-MD5, DES-CBC3-SHA (STARTTLS only).

      ${cipher_bits}
           The  effective keylength (in bits) of the symmet-
           ric encryption algorithm used for a  TLS  connec-
           tion.

      ${client_addr}
           The   IP   address  of  the  SMTP  client.   IPv6
           addresses are  tagged  with  "IPv6:"  before  the
           address.  Defined in the SMTP server only.










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-79


      ${client_connections}
           The number of open connections in the SMTP server
           for the client IP address.

      ${client_flags}
           The flags specified  by  the  Modifier=  part  of
           ClientPortOptions  where flags are separated from
           each other by spaces and  upper  case  flags  are
           doubled.   That  is,  Modifier=hA  will be repre-
           sented as "h AA"  in  ${client_flags},  which  is
           required for testing the flags in rulesets.

      ${client_name}
           The  host  name  of the SMTP client.  This may be
           the client's bracketed IP address in the  form  [
           nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn     ]     for    IPv4    and    [
           IPv6:nnnn:...:nnnn ] for IPv6 if the client's  IP
           address is not resolvable, or if it is resolvable
           but the  IP  address  of  the  resolved  hostname
           doesn't  match  the original IP address.  Defined
           in   the   SMTP   server    only.     See    also
           ${client_resolve}.

      ${client_port}
           The  port  number of the SMTP client.  Defined in
           the SMTP server only.

      ${client_ptr}
           The result of the PTR lookup for  the  client  IP
           address.     Note:    this   is   the   same   as
           ${client_name} if and only  if  ${client_resolve}
           is OK.  Defined in the SMTP server only.

      ${client_rate}
           The number of incoming connections for the client
           IP address over the time  interval  specified  by
           ConnectionRateWindowSize.

      ${client_resolve}
           Holds   the   result  of  the  resolve  call  for
           ${client_name}.  Possible values are:


               OK        resolved successfully
               FAIL      permanent lookup failure
               FORGED    forward lookup doesn't match reverse lookup
               TEMP      temporary lookup failure

           Defined in the SMTP server only.   sendmail  per-
           forms  a hostname lookup on the IP address of the
           connecting client.  Next the IP addresses of that
           hostname are looked up.  If the client IP address
           does not appear in that list, then  the  hostname










SMM:08-80          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


           is  maybe forged.  This is reflected as the value
           FORGED for ${client_resolve} and it also shows up
           in $_ as "(may be forged)".

      ${cn_issuer}
           The  CN  (common  name) of the CA that signed the
           presented certificate (STARTTLS only).  Note:  if
           the  CN  cannot  be extracted properly it will be
           replaced by one of these  strings  based  on  the
           encountered error:


               BadCertificateContainsNULCN contains a NUL character
               BadCertificateTooLong    CN is too long
               BadCertificateUnknown    CN could not be extracted

           In  the  last case, some other (unspecific) error
           occurred.

      ${cn_subject}
           The CN (common name) of the presented certificate
           (STARTTLS  only).   See ${cn_issuer} for possible
           replacements.

      ${currHeader}
           Header value as quoted string (possibly truncated
           to  MAXNAME).   This  macro  is only available in
           header check rulesets.

      ${daemon_addr}
           The IP address the daemon  is  listening  on  for
           connections.

      ${daemon_family}
           The  network  family  if  the daemon is accepting
           network  connections.   Possible  values  include
           "inet", "inet6", "iso", "ns", "x.25"

      ${daemon_flags}
           The flags for the daemon as specified by the Mod-
           ifier=  part  of  DaemonPortOptions  whereby  the
           flags  are  separated  from each other by spaces,
           and upper case flags are doubled.  That is, Modi-
           fier=Ea  will  be represented as "EE a" in ${dae-
           mon_flags}, which is  required  for  testing  the
           flags in rulesets.

      ${daemon_info}
           Some information about a daemon as a text string.
           For example, "SMTP+queueing@00:30:00".

      ${daemon_name}
           The name of  the  daemon  from  DaemonPortOptions










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-81


           Name=  suboption.   If this suboption is not set,
           "Daemon#", where # is the daemon number, is used.

      ${daemon_port}
           The port the daemon is accepting  connection  on.
           Unless  DaemonPortOptions  is set, this will most
           likely be "25".

      ${deliveryMode}
           The current delivery mode sendmail is using.   It
           is initially set to the value of the DeliveryMode
           option.

      ${envid}
           The envelope  id  parameter  (ENVID=)  passed  to
           sendmail as part of the envelope.

      ${hdrlen}
           The length of the header value which is stored in
           ${currHeader} (before possible  truncation).   If
           this  value  is  greater than or equal to MAXNAME
           the header has been truncated.

      ${hdr_name}
           The name of the header field for which  the  cur-
           rent  header check ruleset has been called.  This
           is useful for a default header check  ruleset  to
           get  the  name  of  the header; the macro is only
           available in header check rulesets.

      ${if_addr}
           The IP address of the interface  of  an  incoming
           connection  unless  it  is  in  the loopback net.
           IPv6 addresses are tagged with "IPv6:" before the
           address.

      ${if_addr_out}
           The  IP  address  of the interface of an outgoing
           connection unless it  is  in  the  loopback  net.
           IPv6 addresses are tagged with "IPv6:" before the
           address.

      ${if_family}
           The IP family of the  interface  of  an  incoming
           connection unless it is in the loopback net.

      ${if_family_out}
           The  IP  family  of  the interface of an outgoing
           connection unless it is in the loopback net.

      ${if_name}
           The hostname associated with the interface of  an
           incoming  connection.  This macro can be used for










SMM:08-82          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


           SmtpGreetingMessage  and  HReceived  for  virtual
           hosting.  For example:


               O SmtpGreetingMessage=$?{if_name}${if_name}$|$j$. MTA


      ${if_name_out}
           The  name of the interface of an outgoing connec-
           tion.

      ${load_avg}
           The current load average.

      ${mail_addr}
           The address part of the resolved  triple  of  the
           address given for the SMTP MAIL command.  Defined
           in the SMTP server only.

      ${mail_host}
           The host from the resolved triple of the  address
           given  for the SMTP MAIL command.  Defined in the
           SMTP server only.

      ${mail_mailer}
           The  mailer  from  the  resolved  triple  of  the
           address given for the SMTP MAIL command.  Defined
           in the SMTP server only.

      ${msg_id}
           The value of the Message-Id: header.

      ${msg_size}
           The value of the SIZE= parameter,  i.e.,  usually
           the  size  of the message (in an ESMTP dialogue),
           before the message has been collected, thereafter
           the message size as computed by sendmail (and can
           be used in check_compat).

      ${nbadrcpts}
           The number of bad recipients for  a  single  mes-
           sage.

      ${nrcpts}
           The  number  of validated recipients for a single
           message.  Note: since recipient  validation  hap-
           pens  after check_rcpt has been called, the value
           in this ruleset is one less than  what  might  be
           expected.

      ${ntries}
           The number of delivery attempts.











Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-83


      ${opMode}
           The current operation mode (from the -b flag).

      ${quarantine}
           The  quarantine reason for the envelope, if it is
           quarantined.

      ${queue_interval}
           The queue run interval given by the -q flag.  For
           example,  -q30m  would  set  ${queue_interval} to
           "00:30:00".

      ${rcpt_addr}
           The address part of the resolved  triple  of  the
           address given for the SMTP RCPT command.  Defined
           in the SMTP server only after a RCPT command.

      ${rcpt_host}
           The host from the resolved triple of the  address
           given  for the SMTP RCPT command.  Defined in the
           SMTP server only after a RCPT command.

      ${rcpt_mailer}
           The  mailer  from  the  resolved  triple  of  the
           address given for the SMTP RCPT command.  Defined
           in the SMTP server only after a RCPT command.

      ${server_addr}
           The address of the server of the current outgoing
           SMTP  connection.  For LMTP delivery the macro is
           set to the name of the mailer.

      ${server_name}
           The name of the server of  the  current  outgoing
           SMTP or LMTP connection.

      ${time}
           The  output  of  the  time(3) function, i.e., the
           number of seconds since 0  hours,  0  minutes,  0
           seconds,  January  1, 1970, Coordinated Universal
           Time (UTC).

      ${tls_version}
           The TLS/SSL  version  used  for  the  connection,
           e.g., TLSv1, SSLv3, SSLv2; defined after STARTTLS
           has been used.

      ${total_rate}
           The total number of incoming connections over the
           time  interval specified by ConnectionRateWindow-
           Size.












SMM:08-84          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


      ${verify}
           The result of the verification of  the  presented
           cert;  only  defined after STARTTLS has been used
           (or attempted).  Possible values are:


               OK           verification succeeded.
               NO           no cert presented.
               NOT          no cert requested.
               FAIL         cert presented but could not be verified,
                            e.g., the signing CA is missing.
               NONE         STARTTLS has not been performed.
               TEMP         temporary error occurred.
               PROTOCOL     some protocol error occurred
                            at the ESMTP level (not TLS).
               SOFTWARE     STARTTLS handshake failed,
                            which is a fatal error for this session,
                            the e-mail will be queued.


           There are three types of dates that can be  used.
      The  $a and $b macros are in RFC 822 format; $a is the
      time as extracted from the "Date:" line of the message
      (if  there  was  one),  and $b is the current date and
      time (used for postmarks).   If  no  "Date:"  line  is
      found  in  the incoming message, $a is set to the cur-
      rent time also.  The $d macro is equivalent to the  $b
      macro in UNIX (ctime) format.

           The macros $w, $j, and $m are set to the identity
      of this host.  Sendmail tries to find the fully quali-
      fied name of the host if at all possible; it does this
      by calling gethostname(2) to get the current  hostname
      and  then  passing  that  to gethostbyname(3) which is
      supposed to return the canonical version of that  host
      name.[17]  Assuming  this  is successful, $j is set to
      the fully qualified name and $m is set to  the  domain
      part  of  the  name  (everything after the first dot).
      The $w macro is set  to  the  first  word  (everything
      before  the first dot) if you have a level 5 or higher
      configuration file; otherwise, it is set to  the  same
      value as $j.  If the canonification is not successful,
      it is imperative that the config file set  $j  to  the
      fully qualified domain name[18].

____________________
   [17]For example, on some systems gethostname might return
"foo" which would be mapped to "foo.bar.com"  by  gethostby-
name.
   [18]Older  versions  of  sendmail didn't pre-define $j at
all, so up until 8.6, config files always had to define $j.












Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-85


           The $f macro is the id of the  sender  as  origi-
      nally  determined; when mailing to a specific host the
      $g macro is set to the address of the sender  relative
      to  the  recipient.   For  example, if I send to "bol-
      lard@matisse.CS.Berkeley.EDU" from the  machine  "van-
      gogh.CS.Berkeley.EDU"  the $f macro will be "eric" and
      the $g macro will be "eric@vangogh.CS.Berkeley.EDU."

           The $x macro is set  to  the  full  name  of  the
      sender.   This  can be determined in several ways.  It
      can be passed as flag to sendmail.  It can be  defined
      in the NAME environment variable.  The third choice is
      the value of the "Full-Name:" line in the header if it
      exists,  and the fourth choice is the comment field of
      a "From:" line.  If all of these fail, and if the mes-
      sage  is  being  originated  locally, the full name is
      looked up in the /etc/passwd file.

           When sending, the $h, $u, and $z macros  get  set
      to  the  host,  user, and home directory (if local) of
      the recipient.  The first two are set from the $@  and
      $: part of the rewriting rules, respectively.

           The  $p  and  $t macros are used to create unique
      strings (e.g., for the "Message-Id:" field).   The  $i
      macro is set to the queue id on this host; if put into
      the timestamp line it  can  be  extremely  useful  for
      tracking messages.  The $v macro is set to be the ver-
      sion number of sendmail; this is normally put in time-
      stamps and has been proven extremely useful for debug-
      ging.

           The $c field is set to the "hop count," i.e., the
      number of times this message has been processed.  This
      can be determined by the -h flag on the  command  line
      or by counting the timestamps in the message.

           The $r and $s fields are set to the protocol used
      to communicate with sendmail and the sending hostname.
      They  can  be  set  together using the -p command line
      flag or separately using the -M or -oM flags.

           The $_ is set to a validated  sender  host  name.
      If  the  sender is running an RFC 1413 compliant IDENT
      server and the receiver has the IDENT protocol  turned
      on, it will include the user name on that host.

           The     ${client_name},    ${client_addr},    and
      ${client_port} macros are set to  the  name,  address,
      and  port  number  of  the SMTP client who is invoking
      sendmail as a  server.   These  can  be  used  in  the
      check_*  rulesets  (using  the  $& deferred evaluation
      form, of course!).










SMM:08-86          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


   5.3.  C and F -- Define Classes

           Classes of phrases may be defined to match on the
      left hand side of rewriting rules, where a "phrase" is
      a sequence of characters that does not  contain  space
      characters.   For  example  a class of all local names
      for this site might be created  so  that  attempts  to
      send  to  oneself can be eliminated.  These can either
      be defined directly in the configuration file or  read
      in  from  another file.  Classes are named as a single
      letter or a word in {braces}.  Class  names  beginning
      with  lower  case  letters  and special characters are
      reserved for system use.  Classes  defined  in  config
      files  may  be  given names from the set of upper case
      letters for short names or  beginning  with  an  upper
      case letter for long names.

           The syntax is:


          Ccphrase1 phrase2...
          Fcfile
          Fc|program
          Fc[mapkey]@mapclass:mapspec

      The first form defines the class c to match any of the
      named words.  If phrase1 or phrase2 is another  class,
      e.g.,  $=S, the contents of class S are added to class
      c.  It is permissible to  split  them  among  multiple
      lines; for example, the two forms:


          CHmonet ucbmonet

      and


          CHmonet
          CHucbmonet

      are  equivalent.  The ``F'' forms read the elements of
      the class c from the named file, program, or map spec-
      ification.   Each  element should be listed on a sepa-
      rate line.  To specify an optional  file,  use  ``-o''
      between the class name and the file name, e.g.,


          Fc -o /path/to/file

      If  the file can't be used, sendmail will not complain
      but silently ignore it.  The map  form  should  be  an
      optional map key, an at sign, and a map class followed
      by the specification for that map.  Examples include:










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-87


          F{VirtHosts}@ldap:-k (&(objectClass=virtHosts)(host=*)) -v host
          F{MyClass}foo@hash:/etc/mail/classes

      will fill the class $={VirtHosts}  from  an  LDAP  map
      lookup and $={MyClass} from a hash database map lookup
      of the foo.  There is also a built-in schema that  can
      be accessed by only specifying:


          F{ClassName}@LDAP

      This will tell sendmail to use the default schema:


          -k (&(objectClass=sendmailMTAClass)
               (sendmailMTAClassName=ClassName)
               (|(sendmailMTACluster=${sendmailMTACluster})
                 (sendmailMTAHost=$j)))
          -v sendmailMTAClassValue

      Note  that  the  lookup  is only done when sendmail is
      initially started.

           Elements of classes  can  be  accessed  in  rules
      using  $=  or $~.  The $~ (match entries not in class)
      only matches a single word; multi-word entries in  the
      class are ignored in this context.

           Some classes have internal meaning to sendmail:

      $=e  contains  the Content-Transfer-Encodings that can
           be 8->7 bit encoded.  It is predefined to contain
           "7bit", "8bit", and "binary".

      $=k  set  to be the same as $k, that is, the UUCP node
           name.

      $=m  set to the set of domains by which this  host  is
           known, initially just $m.

      $=n  can be set to the set of MIME body types that can
           never be eight to seven bit encoded.  It defaults
           to "multipart/signed".  Message types "message/*"
           and "multipart/*"  are  never  encoded  directly.
           Multipart  messages  are  always  handled  recur-
           sively.  The handling of message/*  messages  are
           controlled by class $=s.

      $=q  A set of Content-Types that will never be encoded
           as base64 (if they have to be encoded, they  will
           be  encoded  as  quoted-printable).   It can have
           primary types (e.g., "text") or full types  (such
           as "text/plain").










SMM:08-88          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


      $=s  contains  the set of subtypes of message that can
           be treated recursively.  By default  it  contains
           only "rfc822".  Other "message/*" types cannot be
           8->7 bit encoded.  If a message containing  eight
           bit  data  is  sent to a seven bit host, and that
           message cannot be encoded  into  seven  bits,  it
           will be stripped to 7 bits.

      $=t  set to the set of trusted users by the T configu-
           ration line.  If you want to read  trusted  users
           from a file, use Ft/file/name.

      $=w  set to be the set of all names this host is known
           by.  This can be used to match local hostnames.

      $={persistentMacros}
           set to the macros that  should  be  saved  across
           queue  runs.   Care  should  be taken when adding
           macro names to this class.

           Sendmail can be  compiled  to  allow  a  scanf(3)
      string  on  the  F  line.  This lets you do simplistic
      parsing of text files.  For example, to read  all  the
      user  names  in  your  system  /etc/passwd file into a
      class, use


          FL/etc/passwd %[^:]

      which reads every line up to the first colon.

   5.4.  M -- Define Mailer

           Programs and interfaces to mailers are defined in
      this line.  The format is:


          Mname, {field=value}*

      where  name is the name of the mailer (used internally
      only) and the "field=name" pairs define attributes  of
      the mailer.  Fields are:





















Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-89


          Path      The pathname of the mailer
          Flags     Special flags for this mailer
          Sender    Rewriting set(s) for sender addresses
          Recipient Rewriting set(s) for recipient addresses
          recipientsMaximum number of recipients per connection
          Argv      An argument vector to pass to this mailer
          Eol       The end-of-line string for this mailer
          Maxsize   The maximum message length to this mailer
          maxmessagesThe maximum message deliveries per connection
          Linelimit The maximum line length in the message body
          Directory The working directory for the mailer
          Userid    The default user and group id to run as
          Nice      The nice(2) increment for the mailer
          Charset   The default character set for 8-bit characters
          Type      Type information for DSN diagnostics
          Wait      The maximum time to wait for the mailer
          QueuegroupThe default queue group for the mailer
          /         The root directory for the mailer

      Only  the first character of the field name is checked
      (it's case-sensitive).

           The following flags may  be  set  in  the  mailer
      description.   Any  other  flags may be used freely to
      conditionally assign headers to messages destined  for
      particular  mailers.   Flags  marked  with  *  are not
      interpreted by the sendmail binary; these are the con-
      ventionally  used to correlate to the flags portion of
      the H line.  Flags marked with # apply to the  mailers
      for the sender address rather than the usual recipient
      mailers.

      a   Run Extended SMTP  (ESMTP)  protocol  (defined  in
          RFCs 1869, 1652, and 1870).  This flag defaults on
          if the SMTP greeting  message  includes  the  word
          "ESMTP".

      A   Look  up  the  user (address) part of the resolved
          mailer triple, in the  alias  database.   Normally
          this is only set for local mailers.

      b   Force  a blank line on the end of a message.  This
          is intended to work around some stupid versions of
          /bin/mail  that  require  a blank line, but do not
          provide it themselves.  It would not  normally  be
          used on network mail.

      B   Strip  leading backslashes (\) off of the address;
          this is a subset of the  functionality  of  the  s
          flag.

      c   Do not include comments in addresses.  This should
          only be used if you have to work around  a  remote










SMM:08-90          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


          mailer  that  gets  confused  by  comments.   This
          strips addresses of the form "Phrase <address>" or
          "address (Comment)" down to just "address".

      C#  If  mail  is received from a mailer with this flag
          set, any addresses in the header that do not  have
          an  at sign ("@") after being rewritten by ruleset
          three will have  the  "@domain"  clause  from  the
          sender  envelope  address  tacked on.  This allows
          mail with headers of the form:


              From: usera@hosta
              To: userb@hostb, userc

          to be rewritten as:


              From: usera@hosta
              To: userb@hostb, userc@hosta

          automatically.  However, it  doesn't  really  work
          reliably.

      d   Do not include angle brackets around route-address
          syntax addresses.  This is useful on mailers  that
          are  going to pass addresses to a shell that might
          interpret angle brackets as I/O redirection.  How-
          ever,  it  does  not  protect  against other shell
          metacharacters.  Therefore, passing addresses to a
          shell should not be considered secure.

      D*  This mailer wants a "Date:" header line.

      e   This  mailer is expensive to connect to, so try to
          avoid connecting normally; any  necessary  connec-
          tion  will  occur  during  a  queue run.  See also
          option HoldExpensive.

      E   Escape lines beginning with "From " in the message
          with a `>' sign.

      f   The  mailer wants a -f from flag, but only if this
          is a network forward operation (i.e.,  the  mailer
          will  give an error if the executing user does not
          have special permissions).

      F*  This mailer wants a "From:" header line.

      g   Normally,  sendmail  sends  internally   generated
          email (e.g., error messages) using the null return
          address as required by RFC  1123.   However,  some
          mailers  don't  accept  a null return address.  If










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-91


          necessary, you can set the g flag to prevent send-
          mail  from  obeying  the standards; error messages
          will be sent as from the MAILER-DAEMON  (actually,
          the value of the $n macro).

      h   Upper  case should be preserved in host names (the
          $@ portion of the  mailer  triplet  resolved  from
          ruleset 0) for this mailer.

      i   Do  User  Database  rewriting  on  envelope sender
          address.

      I   This flag is deprecated and will be removed from a
          future version.  This mailer will be speaking SMTP
          to another sendmail -- as such it can use  special
          protocol  features.   This flag should not be used
          except for debugging purposes because it uses VERB
          as SMTP command.

      j   Do  User  Database rewriting on recipients as well
          as senders.

      k   Normally when sendmail  connects  to  a  host  via
          SMTP, it checks to make sure that this isn't acci-
          dently the same host name as might happen if send-
          mail  is  misconfigured  or if a long-haul network
          interface is set in loopback mode.  This flag dis-
          ables  the loopback check.  It should only be used
          under very unusual circumstances.

      K   Currently unimplemented.  Reserved for chunking.

      l   This mailer is local (i.e., final delivery will be
          performed).

      L   Limit  the  line  lengths as specified in RFC 821.
          This deprecated option should be replaced  by  the
          L=  mail declaration.  For historic reasons, the L
          flag also sets the 7 flag.

      m   This mailer can send to multiple users on the same
          host  in  one transaction.  When a $u macro occurs
          in the argv part of the  mailer  definition,  that
          field will be repeated as necessary for all quali-
          fying users.  Removing this flag can defeat dupli-
          cate supression on a remote site as each recipient
          is sent in a separate transaction.

      M*  This mailer wants a "Message-Id:" header line.

      n   Do not insert a  UNIX-style  "From"  line  on  the
          front of the message.











SMM:08-92          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


      o   Always  run as the owner of the recipient mailbox.
          Normally sendmail runs as the sender  for  locally
          generated  mail or as "daemon" (actually, the user
          specified in the u option) when delivering network
          mail.   The  normal  behavior  is required by most
          local mailers, which will not allow  the  envelope
          sender address to be set unless the mailer is run-
          ning as daemon.  This flag is  ignored  if  the  S
          flag is set.

      p   Use  the route-addr style reverse-path in the SMTP
          "MAIL FROM:" command rather than just  the  return
          address; although this is required in RFC 821 sec-
          tion 3.1, many hosts do not process  reverse-paths
          properly.   Reverse-paths  are officially discour-
          aged by RFC 1123.

      P*  This mailer wants a "Return-Path:" line.

      q   When an address that resolves to  this  mailer  is
          verified   (SMTP   VRFY   command),  generate  250
          responses instead of  252  responses.   This  will
          imply that the address is local.

      r   Same as f, but sends a -r flag.

      R   Open   SMTP  connections  from  a  "secure"  port.
          Secure ports aren't (secure, that  is)  except  on
          UNIX  machines,  so  it  is unclear that this adds
          anything.  sendmail must be running as root to  be
          able to use this flag.

      s   Strip  quote  characters  ("  and  \)  off  of the
          address before calling the mailer.

      S   Don't reset the userid before calling the  mailer.
          This  would  be used in a secure environment where
          sendmail ran as root.  This could be used to avoid
          forged  addresses.  If the U= field is also speci-
          fied, this flag causes the effective user id to be
          set to that user.

      u   Upper  case  should be preserved in user names for
          this mailer.  Standards  require  preservation  of
          case  in  the  local part of addresses, except for
          those  address  for  which  your  system   accepts
          responsibility.   RFC 2142 provides a long list of
          addresses which should be  case  insensitive.   If
          you  use this flag, you may be violating RFC 2142.
          Note that postmaster is always treated as  a  case
          insensitive address regardless of this flag.












Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-93


      U   This mailer wants UUCP-style "From" lines with the
          ugly "remote from <host>" on the end.

      w   The  user  must  have  a  valid  account  on  this
          machine, i.e., getpwnam must succeed.  If not, the
          mail is bounced.   See  also  the  MailBoxDatabase
          option.   This is required to get ".forward" capa-
          bility.

      W   Ignore long term host status information (see Sec-
          tion "Persistent Host Status Information").

      x*  This mailer wants a "Full-Name:" header line.

      X   This  mailer wants to use the hidden dot algorithm
          as specified  in  RFC  821;  basically,  any  line
          beginning  with  a  dot  will  have  an  extra dot
          prepended (to be stripped at the other end).  This
          insures that lines in the message containing a dot
          will not terminate the message prematurely.

      z   Run Local Mail Transfer  Protocol  (LMTP)  between
          sendmail  and the local mailer.  This is a variant
          on SMTP defined in RFC 2033 that  is  specifically
          designed for delivery to a local mailbox.

      Z   Apply DialDelay (if set) to this mailer.

      0   Don't  look  up  MX  records  for  hosts  sent via
          SMTP/LMTP.  Do not apply FallbackMXhost either.

      1   Don't send null characters ('\0') to this mailer.

      2   Don't use ESMTP even if offered;  this  is  useful
          for  broken  systems  that offer ESMTP but fail on
          EHLO (without recovering when HELO is tried next).

      3   Extend the list of  characters  converted  to  =XX
          notation  when  converting  to Quoted-Printable to
          include those that don't map cleanly between ASCII
          and  EBCDIC.  Useful if you have IBM mainframes on
          site.

      5   If no aliases are found for this address, pass the
          address  through  ruleset 5 for possible alternate
          resolution.  This is intended to forward the  mail
          to an alternate delivery spot.

      6   Strip headers to seven bits.

      7   Strip  all  output  to  seven  bits.   This is the
          default if the L flag is set.  Note that  clearing
          this  option  is  not sufficient to get full eight










SMM:08-94          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


          bit data passed through sendmail.  If the 7 option
          is  set, this is essentially always set, since the
          eighth bit was stripped on input.  Note that  this
          option  will only impact messages that didn't have
          8->7 bit MIME conversions performed.

      8   If set, it is acceptable to send eight bit data to
          this mailer; the usual attempt to do 8->7 bit MIME
          conversions will be bypassed.

      9   If set, do  limited  7->8  bit  MIME  conversions.
          These conversions are limited to text/plain data.

      :   Check  addresses to see if they begin ":include:";
          if  they  do,  convert  them  to  the  "*include*"
          mailer.

      |   Check  addresses  to see if they begin with a `|';
          if they do, convert them to the "prog" mailer.

      /   Check addresses to see if they begin with  a  `/';
          if they do, convert them to the "*file*" mailer.

      @   Look up addresses in the user database.

      %   Do  not  attempt  delivery on initial receipt of a
          message or on queue runs unless the queued message
          is selected using one of the -qI/-qR/-qS queue run
          modifiers or an ETRN request.

      !   Disable an MH hack that drops  an  explicit  From:
          header  if  it  is the same as what sendmail would
          generate.

           Configuration files prior to level 6  assume  the
      `A',  `w',  `5', `:', `|', `/', and `@' options on the
      mailer named "local".

           The mailer with the special name "error"  can  be
      used  to  generate  a user error.  The (optional) host
      field is an exit status to be returned, and  the  user
      field is a message to be printed.  The exit status may
      be numeric or one of the values USAGE, NOUSER, NOHOST,
      UNAVAILABLE,  SOFTWARE,  TEMPFAIL, PROTOCOL, or CONFIG
      to return the  corresponding  EX_  exit  code,  or  an
      enhanced error code as described in RFC 1893, Enhanced
      Mail System Status Codes.  For example, the entry:


          $#error $@ NOHOST $: Host unknown in this domain

      on the RHS of a rule will cause the specified error to
      be  generated and the "Host unknown" exit status to be










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-95


      returned if the LHS  matches.   This  mailer  is  only
      functional  in  rulesets  0,  5, or one of the check_*
      rulesets.  The host field can also contain the special
      token  quarantine  which instructs sendmail to quaran-
      tine the current message.

           The mailer with the special name "discard" causes
      any  mail  sent  to  it  to be discarded but otherwise
      treated as  though  it  were  successfully  delivered.
      This  mailer  cannot be used in ruleset 0, only in the
      various address checking rulesets.

           The mailer named "local" must be defined in every
      configuration  file.   This  is  used to deliver local
      mail, and is treated specially in several ways.  Addi-
      tionally,  three other mailers named "prog", "*file*",
      and "*include*" may be defined to tune the delivery of
      messages  to  programs,  files,  and  :include:  lists
      respectively.  They default to:


          Mprog, P=/bin/sh, F=lsoDq9, T=DNS/RFC822/X-Unix, A=sh -c $u
          M*file*, P=[FILE], F=lsDFMPEouq9, T=DNS/RFC822/X-Unix, A=FILE $u
          M*include*, P=/dev/null, F=su, A=INCLUDE $u


           Builtin pathnames are [FILE] and [IPC], the  for-
      mer  is  used  for  delivery  to files, the latter for
      delivery via interprocess communication.  For  mailers
      that  use  [IPC]  as pathname the argument vector (A=)
      must start with TCP or FILE for delivery via a TCP  or
      a  Unix  domain  socket.   If  TCP is used, the second
      argument must be the name  of  the  host  to  contact.
      Optionally  a  third argument can be used to specify a
      port, the default is smtp (port 25).  If FILE is used,
      the  second  argument  must  be  the  name of the Unix
      domain socket.

           If the argument vector does not contain  $u  then
      sendmail will speak SMTP (or LMTP if the mailer flag z
      is specified) to the mailer.

           If no Eol field is defined, then the  default  is
      "\r\n" for SMTP mailers and "\n" of others.

           The  Sender  and  Recipient  rewriting  sets  may
      either be a simple ruleset id or may be two ids  sepa-
      rated  by  a  slash; if so, the first rewriting set is
      applied  to  envelope  addresses  and  the  second  is
      applied  to  headers.   Setting any value to zero dis-
      ables corresponding mailer-specific rewriting.












SMM:08-96          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


           The Directory is actually a colon-separated  path
      of  directories  to  try.  For example, the definition
      "D=$z:/" first tries to  execute  in  the  recipient's
      home  directory; if that is not available, it tries to
      execute in  the  root  of  the  filesystem.   This  is
      intended  to  be used only on the "prog" mailer, since
      some shells (such as csh) refuse to  execute  if  they
      cannot  read  the  current directory.  Since the queue
      directory is not  normally  readable  by  unprivileged
      users csh scripts as recipients can fail.

           The  Userid  specifies the default user and group
      id  to  run  as,  overriding  the  DefaultUser  option
      (q.v.).   If the S mailer flag is also specified, this
      user and group will be set as the  effective  uid  and
      gid  for the process.  This may be given as user:group
      to set both the user and group id; either  may  be  an
      integer  or  a  symbolic  name  to be looked up in the
      passwd and group files respectively.  If only  a  sym-
      bolic  user  name  is  specified,  the group id in the
      passwd file for that user is used as the group id.

           The Charset field is used when converting a  mes-
      sage  to  MIME;  this is the character set used in the
      Content-Type:  header.   If  this  is  not  set,   the
      DefaultCharset option is used, and if that is not set,
      the value "unknown-8bit" is used.  WARNING: this field
      applies  to  the  sender's mailer, not the recipient's
      mailer.  For example, if the envelope  sender  address
      lists  an address on the local network and the recipi-
      ent is on an external network, the character set  will
      be  set  from the Charset= field for the local network
      mailer, not that of the external network mailer.

           The Type= field sets the type information used in
      MIME  error  messages  as  defined by RFC 1894.  It is
      actually three values separated by slashes:  the  MTA-
      type  (that  is,  the  description  of  how  hosts are
      named), the address type (the  description  of  e-mail
      addresses),  and  the diagnostic type (the description
      of error diagnostic codes).  Each of these must  be  a
      registered  value  or begin with "X-".  The default is
      "dns/rfc822/smtp".

           The m= field specifies the maximum number of mes-
      sages  to  attempt to deliver on a single SMTP or LMTP
      connection.  The default is infinite.

           The r= field  specifies  the  maximum  number  of
      recipients to attempt to deliver in a single envelope.
      It defaults to 100.












Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-97


           The /= field specifies a new root  directory  for
      the  mailer.   The  path  is  macro  expanded and then
      passed to the "chroot" system call.  The  root  direc-
      tory  is  changed  before  the Directory field is con-
      sulted or the uid is changed.

           The Wait= field specifies  the  maximum  time  to
      wait  for  the mailer to return after sending all data
      to it.  This applies to mailers that have been  forked
      by sendmail.

           The Queuegroup= field specifies the default queue
      group in which received mail should be  queued.   This
      can  be overridden by other means as explained in sec-
      tion ``Queue Groups and Queue Directories''.

   5.5.  H -- Define Header

           The format of  the  header  lines  that  sendmail
      inserts  into  the  message are defined by the H line.
      The syntax of this line is one of the following:


          Hhname: htemplate



          H[?mflags?]hname: htemplate



          H[?${macro}?]hname: htemplate

      Continuation lines in this spec are reflected directly
      into  the  outgoing  message.  The htemplate is macro-
      expanded before insertion into the  message.   If  the
      mflags  (surrounded  by question marks) are specified,
      at least one of the specified flags must be stated  in
      the  mailer definition for this header to be automati-
      cally output.  If a ${macro} (surrounded  by  question
      marks)  is specified, the header will be automatically
      output if the macro is set.   The  macro  may  be  set
      using  any  of the normal methods, including using the
      macro storage map in a ruleset.  If one of these head-
      ers  is  in  the  input  it is reflected to the output
      regardless of these flags or  macros.   Notice:  If  a
      ${macro} is used to set a header, then it is useful to
      add that macro  to  class  $={persistentMacros}  which
      consists  of  the  macros  that should be saved across
      queue runs.

           Some headers have special semantics that will  be
      described later.










SMM:08-98          Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


           A  secondary  syntax allows validation of headers
      as they are being read.  To enable validation, use:


          HHeader: $>Ruleset
          HHeader: $>+Ruleset

      The indicated Ruleset  is  called  for  the  specified
      Header, and can return $#error to reject or quarantine
      the message or $#discard to discard  the  message  (as
      with   the   other  check_*  rulesets).   The  ruleset
      receives the header field-body as argument, i.e.,  not
      the header field-name; see also ${hdr_name} and ${cur-
      rHeader}.  The  header  is  treated  as  a  structured
      field,  that is, text in parentheses is deleted before
      processing, unless the second form $>+ is used.  Note:
      only  one  ruleset  can  be  associated with a header;
      sendmail will silently ignore multiple entries.

           For example, the configuration lines:


          HMessage-Id: $>CheckMessageId

          SCheckMessageId
          R< $+ @ $+  >$@ OK
          R$*       $#error $: Illegal Message-Id header

      would refuse any message that had a Message-Id: header
      of any of the following forms:


          Message-Id: <>
          Message-Id: some text
          Message-Id: <legal text@domain> extra crud

      A  default  ruleset  that  is called for headers which
      don't have a specific ruleset defined for them can  be
      specified by:


          H*: $>Ruleset

      or


          H*: $>+Ruleset


   5.6.  O -- Set Option

           There  are a number of global options that can be
      set  from   a   configuration   file.    Options   are










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide          SMM:08-99


      represented by full words; some are also representable
      as single characters for back compatibility.  The syn-
      tax of this line is:


          O  option=value

      This  sets option option to be value.  Note that there
      must be a space between the letter `O' and the name of
      the option.  An older version is:


          Oovalue

      where  the  option o is a single character.  Depending
      on the option, value may be a string,  an  integer,  a
      boolean  (with legal values "t", "T", "f", or "F"; the
      default is TRUE), or a time interval.

           All filenames used in options should be  absolute
      paths,  i.e.,  starting  with '/'.  Relative filenames
      most likely cause surprises during  operation  (unless
      otherwise noted).

           The  options supported (with the old, one charac-
      ter names in brackets) are:

      AliasFile=spec, spec, ...
                [A] Specify possible  alias  file(s).   Each
                spec should be in the format ``class: info''
                where class: is  optional  and  defaults  to
                ``implicit''.   Note  that  info is required
                for all  classes  except  "ldap".   For  the
                "ldap"  class,  if  info is not specified, a
                default info value is used as follows:


                    -k (&(objectClass=sendmailMTAAliasObject)
                         (sendmailMTAAliasName=aliases)
                         (|(sendmailMTACluster=${sendmailMTACluster})
                           (sendmailMTAHost=$j))
                         (sendmailMTAKey=%0))
                    -v sendmailMTAAliasValue

                Depending on how sendmail is compiled, valid
                classes  are  "implicit"  (search  through a
                compiled-in list of alias  file  types,  for
                back  compatibility),  "hash"  (if  NEWDB is
                specified), "btree" (if NEWDB is specified),
                "dbm" (if NDBM is specified), "stab" (inter-
                nal symbol table -- not normally used unless
                you   have   no   other   database  lookup),
                "sequence"   (use   a   sequence   of   maps










SMM:08-100         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


                previously  declared), "ldap" (if LDAPMAP is
                specified), or "nis" (if NIS is  specified).
                If  a  list  of specs are provided, sendmail
                searches them in order.

      AliasWait=timeout
                [a]  If  set,  wait  up  to  timeout  (units
                default  to  minutes)  for an "@:@" entry to
                exist in the alias database before  starting
                up.   If  it  does not appear in the timeout
                interval issue a warning.

      AllowBogusHELO
                [no short name] If set, allow HELO SMTP com-
                mands  that don't include a host name.  Set-
                ting this violates RFC 1123  section  5.2.5,
                but  is  necessary to interoperate with sev-
                eral SMTP clients.  If there is a value,  it
                is still checked for legitimacy.

      AuthMaxBits=N
                [no short name] Limit the maximum encryption
                strength for the security layer in SMTP AUTH
                (SASL).  Default  is  essentially unlimited.
                This allows to turn off  additional  encryp-
                tion in SASL if STARTTLS is already encrypt-
                ing the communication, because the  existing
                encryption  strength  is  taken into account
                when choosing an algorithm for the  security
                layer.  For example, if STARTTLS is used and
                the symmetric cipher is 3DES, then  the  the
                keylength  (in  bits) is 168.  Hence setting
                AuthMaxBits to 168 will disable any  encryp-
                tion in SASL.

      AuthMechanisms
                [no short name] List of authentication mech-
                anisms for AUTH (separated by spaces).   The
                advertised list of authentication mechanisms
                will be the intersection of  this  list  and
                the  list  of available mechanisms as deter-
                mined by the Cyrus SASL library.  If  START-
                TLS  is  active,  EXTERNAL  will be added to
                this list.   In  that  case,  the  value  of
                {cert_subject} is used as authentication id.

      AuthOptions
                [no  short  name]  List  of options for SMTP
                AUTH consisting of  single  characters  with
                intervening white space or commas.













Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-101


                    A   Use the AUTH= parameter for the MAIL FROM
                        command only when authentication succeeded.
                        This can be used as a workaround for broken
                        MTAs that do not implement RFC 2554 correctly.
                    a   protection from active (non-dictionary) attacks
                        during authentication exchange.
                    c   require mechanisms which pass client credentials,
                        and allow mechanisms which can pass credentials
                        to do so.
                    d   don't permit mechanisms susceptible to passive
                        dictionary attack.
                    f   require forward secrecy between sessions
                        (breaking one won't help break next).
                    m   require mechanisms which provide mutual authentication
                        (only available if using Cyrus SASL v2 or later).
                    p   don't permit mechanisms susceptible to simple
                        passive attack (e.g., PLAIN, LOGIN), unless a
                        security layer is active.
                    y   don't permit mechanisms that allow anonymous login.

                The  first  option  applies to sendmail as a
                client, the others to a server.  Example:


                    O AuthOptions=p,y

                would disallow ANONYMOUS as  AUTH  mechanism
                and  would  allow  PLAIN and LOGIN only if a
                security layer (e.g., provided by  STARTTLS)
                is  already  active.   The options 'a', 'c',
                'd', 'f', 'p', and 'y' refer  to  properties
                of  the  selected SASL mechanisms.  Explana-
                tions of these properties can  be  found  in
                the Cyrus SASL documentation.

      AuthRealm [no  short  name]  The  authentication realm
                that is passed to the  Cyrus  SASL  library.
                If  no  realm is specified, $j is used.  See
                also KNOWNBUGS.

      BadRcptThrottle=N
                [no short name] If  set  and  the  specified
                number of recipients in a single SMTP trans-
                action have been  rejected,  sleep  for  one
                second after each subsequent RCPT command in
                that transaction.

      BlankSub=c
                [B] Set the blank substitution character  to
                c.    Unquoted   spaces   in  addresses  are
                replaced by  this  character.   Defaults  to
                space (i.e., no change is made).











SMM:08-102         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


      CACertPath
                [no  short name] Path to directory with cer-
                tificates of CAs.  This directory  directory
                must  contain the hashes of each CA certifi-
                cate as filenames (or as links to them).

      CACertFile
                [no short name] File containing one or  more
                CA  certificates; see section about STARTTLS
                for more information.

      CertFingerprintAlgorithm
                Specify the fingerprint  algorithm  (digest)
                to  use  for  the  presented  cert.   If the
                option is not set, md5 is used and the macro
                contains   the  cert  fingerprint.   If  the
                option  is  explicitly  set,  the  specified
                algorithm (e.g., sha1) is used and the macro
                ${cert_fp} contains the cert fingerprint.

      CipherList
                Specify  cipher  list  for  STARTTLS.    See
                ciphers(1) for possible values.

      CheckAliases
                [n]   Validate   the  RHS  of  aliases  when
                rebuilding the alias database.

      CheckpointInterval=N
                [C] Checkpoints the queue every  N  (default
                10)  addresses sent.  If your system crashes
                during delivery to a large list,  this  pre-
                vents  retransmission  to any but the last N
                recipients.

      ClassFactor=fact
                [z] The indicated factor  is  multiplied  by
                the  message class (determined by the Prece-
                dence: field in the user header  and  the  P
                lines  in  the  configuration file) and sub-
                tracted from the priority.   Thus,  messages
                with  a  higher  Priority:  will be favored.
                Defaults to 1800.

      ClientCertFile
                [no short name] File containing the certifi-
                cate  of  the client, i.e., this certificate
                is used when sendmail acts  as  client  (for
                STARTTLS).

      ClientKeyFile
                [no  short name] File containing the private
                key belonging to the client certificate (for










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-103


                STARTTLS if sendmail runs as client).

      ClientPortOptions=options
                [O]  Set  client  SMTP options.  The options
                are key=value  pairs  separated  by  commas.
                Known keys are:


                    Port      Name/number of source port for connection (defaults to any free port)
                    Addr      Address mask (defaults INADDR_ANY)
                    Family    Address family (defaults to INET)
                    SndBufSizeSize of TCP send buffer
                    RcvBufSizeSize of TCP receive buffer
                    Modifier  Options (flags) for the client

                The Address mask may be a numeric address in
                IPv4 dot notation or IPv6 colon notation  or
                a network name.  Note that if a network name
                is specified,  only  the  first  IP  address
                returned  for  it  will  be  used.  This may
                cause  indeterminate  behavior  for  network
                names  that  resolve  to multiple addresses.
                Therefore, use of an address is recommended.
                Modifier can be the following character:


                    h         use name of interface for HELO command
                    A         don't use AUTH when sending e-mail
                    S         don't use STARTTLS when sending e-mail

                If  ``h''  is set, the name corresponding to
                the outgoing interface address (whether cho-
                sen  via  the  Connection  parameter  or the
                default) is used for the HELO/EHLO  command.
                However,  the  name  must  not  start with a
                square bracket and it must contain at  least
                one  dot.  This is a simple test whether the
                name is not an IP address (in square  brack-
                ets)  but  a  qualified hostname.  Note that
                multiple  ClientPortOptions   settings   are
                allowed  in  order to give settings for each
                protocol family (e.g., one  for  Family=inet
                and  one  for  Family=inet6).  A restriction
                placed on one family only  affects  outgoing
                connections on that particular family.

      ClientSSLOptions
                A  space  or  comma  separated  list  of SSL
                related options for the  client  side.   See
                SSL_CTX_set_options(3)   for   a  list;  the
                available values depend on the OpenSSL  ver-
                sion against which sendmail is compiled.  By
                default,     SSL_OP_ALL      SSL_OP_NO_SSLv2










SMM:08-104         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


                SSL_OP_NO_TICKET  -SSL_OP_TLSEXT_PADDING are
                used  (if  those  options  are   available).
                Options  can  be  cleared by preceeding them
                with a minus sign.  It is also  possible  to
                specify numerical values, e.g., -0x0010.

      ColonOkInAddr
                [no  short  name] If set, colons are accept-
                able    in    e-mail    addresses     (e.g.,
                "host:user").   If  not set, colons indicate
                the beginning of a RFC 822  group  construct
                ("groupname:   member1,  member2,  ...  mem-
                berN;").  Doubled colons are always  accept-
                able  ("nodename::user")  and  proper route-
                addr       nesting       is       understood
                ("<@relay:user@host>").   Furthermore,  this
                option defaults on if the configuration ver-
                sion level is less than 6 (for back compati-
                bility).  However, it must be off  for  full
                compatibility with RFC 822.

      ConnectionCacheSize=N
                [k]  The  maximum number of open connections
                that will be cached at a time.  The  default
                is  one.   This  delays  closing the current
                connection until either this  invocation  of
                sendmail needs to connect to another host or
                it terminates.  Setting it to zero  defaults
                to  the  old  behavior, that is, connections
                are closed immediately.  Since this consumes
                file   descriptors,   the  connection  cache
                should be kept small: 4 is probably a  prac-
                tical maximum.

      ConnectionCacheTimeout=timeout
                [K] The maximum amount of time a cached con-
                nection will be permitted  to  idle  without
                activity.   If  this  time  is exceeded, the
                connection  is  immediately  closed.    This
                value  should  be small (on the order of ten
                minutes).  Before  sendmail  uses  a  cached
                connection,  it  always sends a RSET command
                to check the connection; if this  fails,  it
                reopens the connection.  This keeps your end
                from failing if the  other  end  times  out.
                The  point  of  this  option is to be a good
                network neighbor and avoid using  up  exces-
                sive   resources  on  the  other  end.   The
                default is five minutes.

      ConnectOnlyTo=address
                [no short name] This can be used to override
                the    connection   address   (for   testing










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-105


                purposes).

      ConnectionRateThrottle=N
                [no short name] If set to a positive  value,
                allow no more than N incoming connections in
                a one second period  per  daemon.   This  is
                intended  to flatten out peaks and allow the
                load average checking to cut  in.   Defaults
                to zero (no limits).

      ConnectionRateWindowSize=N
                [no  short  name]  Define  the length of the
                interval for which the  number  of  incoming
                connections  is  maintained.  The default is
                60 seconds.

      ControlSocketName=name
                [no short name] Name of the  control  socket
                for  daemon  management.  A running sendmail
                daemon can be controlled through this  named
                socket.    Available   commands  are:  help,
                mstat, restart, shutdown, and  status.   The
                status command returns the current number of
                daemon children, the maximum number of  dae-
                mon   children,  the  free  disk  space  (in
                blocks) of the queue directory, and the load
                average of the machine expressed as an inte-
                ger.  If not set, no control socket will  be
                available.   Solaris  and  pre-4.4BSD kernel
                users should see the note in sendmail/README
                .

      CRLFile=name
                [no  short  name] Name of file that contains
                certificate revocation  status,  useful  for
                X.509v3    authentication.    CRL   checking
                requires at  least  OpenSSL  version  0.9.7.
                Note: if a CRLFile is specified but the file
                is unusable, STARTTLS is disabled.

      DHParameters
                This option applies to the server side only.
                Possible values are:


                    5                   use precomputed 512 bit prime.
                    1                   generate 1024 bit prime
                    2                   generate 2048 bit prime.
                    i                   use included precomputed 2048 bit prime (default).
                    none                do not use Diffie-Hellman.
                    /path/to/file       load prime from file.

                This  is  only  required  if  a  ciphersuite










SMM:08-106         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


                containing DSA/DH is used.  The  default  is
                ``i''  which  selects  a  precomputed, fixed
                2048 bit prime.  If ``5'' is selected,  then
                precomputed,  fixed  primes are used.  Note:
                this option should not be used (unless  nec-
                essary  for compatibility with old implemen-
                tations).  If ``1'' or  ``2''  is  selected,
                then   prime   values  are  computed  during
                startup.  Note: this operation  can  take  a
                significant amount of time on a slow machine
                (several seconds), but it is only done  once
                at  startup.   If ``none'' is selected, then
                TLS ciphersuites containing DSA/DH cannot be
                used.   If  a  file name is specified (which
                must be an absolute path), then  the  primes
                are read from it.  It is recommended to gen-
                erate such a file using a command like this:


                                        openssl dhparam -out /etc/mail/dhparams.pem 2048

                If the file  is  not  readable  or  contains
                unusable  data,  the  default  ``i'' is used
                instead.

      DaemonPortOptions=options
                [O] Set server SMTP options.  Each  instance
                of  DaemonPortOptions leads to an additional
                incoming socket.  The options are  key=value
                pairs.  Known keys are:


                    Name      User-definable name for the daemon (defaults to "Daemon#")
                    Port      Name/number of listening port (defaults to "smtp")
                    Addr      Address mask (defaults INADDR_ANY)
                    Family    Address family (defaults to INET)
                    InputMailFiltersList of input mail filters for the daemon
                    Listen    Size of listen queue (defaults to 10)
                    Modifier  Options (flags) for the daemon
                    SndBufSizeSize of TCP send buffer
                    RcvBufSizeSize of TCP receive buffer
                    children  maximum number of children per daemon, see MaxDaemonChildren.
                    DeliveryModeDelivery mode per daemon, see DeliveryMode.
                    refuseLA  RefuseLA per daemon
                    delayLA   DelayLA per daemon
                    queueLA   QueueLA per daemon

                The  Name key is used for error messages and
                logging.  The Address mask may be a  numeric
                address  in  IPv4 dot notation or IPv6 colon
                notation, or a network name, or a path to  a
                local  socket.   Note that if a network name
                is specified,  only  the  first  IP  address










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-107


                returned  for  it  will  be  used.  This may
                cause  indeterminate  behavior  for  network
                names  that  resolve  to multiple addresses.
                Therefore, use of an address is recommended.
                The  Family  key  defaults  to  INET (IPv4).
                IPv6 users who wish to also accept IPv6 con-
                nections  should add additional Family=inet6
                DaemonPortOptions  lines.    For   a   local
                socket,  use  Family=local  or  Family=unix.
                The  InputMailFilters  key   overrides   the
                default list of input mail filters listed in
                the InputMailFilters  option.   If  multiple
                input  mail  filters are required, they must
                be separated  by  semicolons  (not  commas).
                Modifier  can  be  a  sequence  (without any
                delimiters) of the following characters:


                    a         always require authentication
                    b         bind to interface through which mail has been received
                    c         perform hostname canonification (.cf)
                    f         require fully qualified hostname (.cf)
                    s         Run smtps (SMTP over SSL) instead of smtp
                    u         allow unqualified addresses (.cf)
                    A         disable AUTH (overrides 'a' modifier)
                    C         don't perform hostname canonification
                    E         disallow ETRN (see RFC 2476)
                    O         optional; if opening the socket fails ignore it
                    S         don't offer STARTTLS

                That is, one way to specify a  message  sub-
                mission  agent  (MSA)  that  always requires
                authentication is:


                    O DaemonPortOptions=Name=MSA, Port=587, M=Ea

                The modifiers that are marked  with  "(.cf)"
                have  only effect in the standard configura-
                tion file, in which they are  available  via
                ${daemon_flags}.   Notice:  Do  not  use the
                ``a'' modifier on a public  accessible  MTA!
                It  should  only  be  used for a MSA that is
                accessed by  authorized  users  for  initial
                mail submission.  Users must authenticate to
                use a MSA which has this option  turned  on.
                The  flags  ``c''  and  ``C'' can change the
                default for hostname canonification  in  the
                sendmail.cf file.  See the relevant documen-
                tation for FEATURE(nocanonify).   The  modi-
                fier  ``f''  disallows addresses of the form
                user@host   unless   they   are    submitted
                directly.  The flag ``u'' allows unqualified










SMM:08-108         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


                sender addresses, i.e., those without @host.
                ``b''  forces sendmail to bind to the inter-
                face  through  which  the  e-mail  has  been
                received for the outgoing connection.  WARN-
                ING: Use ``b'' only if outgoing mail can  be
                routed  through  the  incoming  connection's
                interface to its destination. No attempt  is
                made  to catch problems due to a misconfigu-
                ration of this parameter, use  it  only  for
                virtual hosting where each virtual interface
                can  connect  to  every  possible  location.
                This  will  also  override possible settings
                via ClientPortOptions.  Note, sendmail  will
                listen on a new socket for each occurence of
                the DaemonPortOptions option in a configura-
                tion  file.  The modifier ``O'' causes send-
                mail to ignore  a  socket  if  it  can't  be
                opened.   This  applies to failures from the
                socket(2) and bind(2) calls.

      DefaultAuthInfo
                [no  short  name]  Filename  that   contains
                default  authentication information for out-
                going connections. This  file  must  contain
                the user id, the authorization id, the pass-
                word (plain text), the realm and the list of
                mechanisms to use on separate lines and must
                be readable by root (or  the  trusted  user)
                only.  If no realm is specified, $j is used.
                If no mechanisms  are  specified,  the  list
                given  by  AuthMechanisms  is used.  Notice:
                this  option  is  deprecated  and  will   be
                removed  in  future  versions.  Moreover, it
                doesn't work for the MSP since it can't read
                the  file (the file must not be group/world-
                readable otherwise sendmail will  complain).
                Use  the authinfo ruleset instead which pro-
                vides more control over  the  usage  of  the
                data anyway.

      DefaultCharSet=charset
                [no  short  name]  When  a  message that has
                8-bit characters but is not in  MIME  format
                is  converted  to MIME (see the EightBitMode
                option) a character set must be included  in
                the  Content-Type:  header.   This character
                set is normally set from the Charset=  field
                of  the  mailer  descriptor.  If that is not
                set, the value of this option is  used.   If
                this   option   is   not   set,   the  value
                "unknown-8bit" is used.












Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-109


      DataFileBufferSize=threshold
                [no short name] Set the threshold, in bytes,
                before   a   memory-based  queue  data  file
                becomes disk-based.   The  default  is  4096
                bytes.

      DeadLetterDrop=file
                [no  short name] Defines the location of the
                system-wide dead.letter file, formerly hard-
                coded   to  /usr/tmp/dead.letter.   If  this
                option is not set  (the  default),  sendmail
                will  not  attempt  to save to a system-wide
                dead.letter file  in  the  event  it  cannot
                bounce  the  mail to the user or postmaster.
                Instead, it will rename the qf  file  as  it
                has  in  the  past when the dead.letter file
                could not be opened.

      DefaultUser=user:group
                [u] Set the default userid  for  mailers  to
                user:group.  If group is omitted and user is
                a user name (as opposed to  a  numeric  user
                id)   the   default   group  listed  in  the
                /etc/passwd file for that user  is  used  as
                the  default group.  Both user and group may
                be numeric.  Mailers without the S  flag  in
                the mailer definition will run as this user.
                Defaults to 1:1.   The  value  can  also  be
                given as a symbolic user name.[19]

      DelayLA=LA
                [no short name] When the system load average
                exceeds LA, sendmail will sleep for one sec-
                ond on most SMTP commands and before accept-
                ing connections.

      DeliverByMin=time
                [0]  Set  minimum  time  for Deliver By SMTP
                Service Extension (RFC 2852).  If 0, no time
                is  listed, if less than 0, the extension is
                not offered, if greater than 0, it is listed
                as  minimum time for the EHLO keyword DELIV-
                ERBY.

      DeliveryMode=x
                [d] Deliver in mode x.  Legal modes are:


____________________
   [19]The  old g option has been combined into the Default-
User option.












SMM:08-110         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


                    i   Deliver interactively (synchronously)
                    b   Deliver in background (asynchronously)
                    q   Just queue the message (deliver during queue run)
                    d   Defer delivery and all map lookups (deliver during queue run)

                Defaults to ``b'' if no option is specified,
                ``i''  if it is specified but given no argu-
                ment  (i.e.,   ``Od''   is   equivalent   to
                ``Odi'').   The  -v  command  line flag sets
                this to  i.   Note:  for  internal  reasons,
                ``i''  does  not work if a milter is enabled
                which can reject or delete  recipients.   In
                that case the mode will be changed to ``b''.

      DialDelay=sleeptime
                [no  short name] Dial-on-demand network con-
                nections can see timeouts if a connection is
                opened  before  the call is set up.  If this
                is set to an interval and a connection times
                out  on the first connection being attempted
                sendmail will sleep for this amount of  time
                and try again.  This should give your system
                time to establish  the  connection  to  your
                service provider.  Units default to seconds,
                so "DialDelay=5" uses a five  second  delay.
                Defaults  to  zero  (no  retry).  This delay
                only applies to mailers  which  have  the  Z
                flag set.

      DirectSubmissionModifiers=modifiers
                Defines  ${daemon_flags} for direct (command
                line)  submissions.   If  not  set,   ${dae-
                mon_flags} is either "CC f" if the option -G
                is used or "c u" otherwise.  Note that  only
                the  the  "CC",  "c", "f", and "u" flags are
                checked.

      DontBlameSendmail=option,option,...
                [no short name] In order to  avoid  possible
                cracking   attempts  caused  by  world-  and
                group-writable files and directories,  send-
                mail  does  paranoid  checking  when opening
                most of its support files.  If for some rea-
                son  you absolutely must run with, for exam-
                ple, a group-writable /etc  directory,  then
                you  will have to turn off this checking (at
                the cost of making your system more vulnera-
                ble to attack).  The possible arguments have
                been  described  earlier.   The  details  of
                these  flags  are  described  above.  Use of
                this option is not recommended.












Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-111


      DontExpandCnames
                [no short name] The standards say  that  all
                host  addresses  used in a mail message must
                be fully canonical.  For  example,  if  your
                host  is  named "Cruft.Foo.ORG" and also has
                an alias of "FTP.Foo.ORG", the  former  name
                must be used at all times.  This is enforced
                during host name canonification ($[  ...  $]
                lookups).  If this option is set, the proto-
                cols are ignored and the  "wrong"  thing  is
                done.   However,  the  IETF is moving toward
                changing this standard, so the behavior  may
                become  acceptable.   Please note that hosts
                downstream may still rewrite the address  to
                be the true canonical name however.

      DontInitGroups
                [no  short name] If set, sendmail will avoid
                using the initgroups(3) call.   If  you  are
                running  NIS,  this causes a sequential scan
                of the groups.byname map,  which  can  cause
                your  NIS server to be badly overloaded in a
                large domain.  The cost of this is that  the
                only  group  found  for  users will be their
                primary  group  (the  one  in  the  password
                file),  which  will make file access permis-
                sions somewhat  more  restrictive.   Has  no
                effect  on  systems  that  don't  have group
                lists.

      DontProbeInterfaces
                [no short name] Sendmail normally finds  the
                names  of  all  interfaces  active  on  your
                machine when it starts  up  and  adds  their
                name to the $=w class of known host aliases.
                If you have a large number of virtual inter-
                faces  or  if  your  DNS inverse lookups are
                slow  this  can  be  time  consuming.   This
                option turns off that probing.  However, you
                will need to be certain to include all vari-
                ant  names  in  the  $=w class by some other
                mechanism.  If  set  to  loopback,  loopback
                interfaces (e.g., lo0) will not be probed.

      DontPruneRoutes
                [R]  Normally,  sendmail  tries to eliminate
                any unnecessary explicit routes when sending
                an error message (as discussed in RFC 1123 S
                5.2.6).  For example, when sending an  error
                message to


                    <@known1,@known2,@known3:user@unknown>










SMM:08-112         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


                sendmail      will     strip     off     the
                "@known1,@known2" in order to make the route
                as  direct  as  possible.  However, if the R
                option is set, this will  be  disabled,  and
                the  mail  will be sent to the first address
                in the route, even if  later  addresses  are
                known.  This may be useful if you are caught
                behind a firewall.

      DoubleBounceAddress=error-address
                [no short name]  If  an  error  occurs  when
                sending  an  error  message,  send the error
                report (termed a "double bounce" because  it
                is an error "bounce" that occurs when trying
                to send another error "bounce") to the indi-
                cated   address.    The   address  is  macro
                expanded at the time of  delivery.   If  not
                set, defaults to "postmaster".  If set to an
                empty string, double bounces are dropped.

      EightBitMode=action
                [8] Set handling of eight-bit  data.   There
                are   two  kinds  of  eight-bit  data:  that
                declared as  such  using  the  BODY=8BITMIME
                ESMTP  declaration or the -B8BITMIME command
                line flag, and undeclared 8-bit  data,  that
                is,  input  that  just  happens  to be eight
                bits.  There are three basic operations that
                can  happen:  undeclared  8-bit  data can be
                automatically converted to  8BITMIME,  unde-
                clared  8-bit data can be passed as-is with-
                out conversion to MIME  (``just  send  8''),
                and  declared 8-bit data can be converted to
                7-bits for transmission  to  a  non-8BITMIME
                mailer.  The possible actions are:


                      s Reject undeclared 8-bit data (``strict'')
                      m Convert undeclared 8-bit data to MIME (``mime'')
                      p Pass undeclared 8-bit data (``pass'')

                In all cases properly declared 8BITMIME data
                will be converted to 7BIT as needed.

      ErrorHeader=file-or-message
                [E] Prepend error messages  with  the  indi-
                cated  message.   If it begins with a slash,
                it is assumed to be the pathname of  a  file
                containing  a  message  (this  is the recom-
                mended setting).  Otherwise, it is a literal
                message.   The  error file might contain the
                name, email address, and/or phone number  of
                a   local   postmaster   who  could  provide










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-113


                assistance to end users.  If the  option  is
                missing or null, or if it names a file which
                does not exist or which is not readable,  no
                message is printed.

      ErrorMode=x
                [e]  Dispose  of  errors  using mode x.  The
                values for x are:


                    p   Print error messages (default)
                    q   No messages, just give exit status
                    m   Mail back errors
                    w   Write back errors (mail if user not logged in)
                    e   Mail back errors (when applicable) and give zero exit stat always

                Note that the last mode, "e", is for Berknet
                error  processing  and should not be used in
                normal circumstances.  Note, too, that  mode
                "q",   only  applies  to  errors  recognized
                before sendmail forks for background  deliv-
                ery.

      FallbackMXhost=fallbackhost
                [V] If specified, the fallbackhost acts like
                a very low priority MX on  every  host.   MX
                records  will  be  looked  up for this host,
                unless the  name  is  surrounded  by  square
                brackets.   This  is  intended to be used by
                sites with poor network connectivity.   Mes-
                sages  which are undeliverable due to tempo-
                rary address failures  (e.g.,  DNS  failure)
                also go to the FallbackMXhost.

      FallBackSmartHost=hostname
                If  specified, the FallBackSmartHost will be
                used in a last-ditch effort for  each  host.
                This  is  intended  to be used by sites with
                "fake internal DNS", e.g., a  company  whose
                DNS  accurately  reflects  the  world inside
                that company's domain but not outside.

      FastSplit [no short name] If set to  a  value  greater
                than  zero  (the  default  is  one), it sup-
                presses the MX  lookups  on  addresses  when
                they  are  initially  sorted,  i.e., for the
                first  delivery   attempt.    This   usually
                results  in faster envelope splitting unless
                the MX records are readily  available  in  a
                local DNS cache.  To enforce initial sorting
                based on MX records set FastSplit  to  zero.
                If  the  mail is submitted directly from the
                command line, then the value also limits the










SMM:08-114         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


                number   of   processes   to   deliver   the
                envelopes; if  more  envelopes  are  created
                they  are  only  queued up and must be taken
                care of by a queue run.  Since  the  default
                submission method is via SMTP (either from a
                MUA or via the MSP), the value of  FastSplit
                is  seldom  used to limit the number of pro-
                cesses to deliver the envelopes.

      ForkEachJob
                [Y] If set, deliver each  job  that  is  run
                from the queue in a separate process.

      ForwardPath=path
                [J]  Set  the  path for searching for users'
                .forward files.  The  default  is  "$z/.for-
                ward".   Some sites that use the automounter
                may prefer  to  change  this  to  "/var/for-
                ward/$u" to search a file with the same name
                as the user in a system directory.   It  can
                also be set to a sequence of paths separated
                by colons; sendmail stops at the first  file
                it  can  successfully  and safely open.  For
                example, "/var/forward/$u:$z/.forward"  will
                search  first  in  /var/forward/username and
                then in ~username/.forward (but only if  the
                first file does not exist).

      HeloName=name
                [no  short name] Set the name to be used for
                HELO/EHLO (instead of $j).

      HoldExpensive
                [c] If an outgoing mailer is marked as being
                expensive, don't connect immediately.

      HostsFile=path
                [no  short name] The path to the hosts data-
                base, normally "/etc/hosts".  This option is
                only  consulted when sendmail is canonifying
                addresses, and then only when "files" is  in
                the  "hosts"  service switch entry.  In par-
                ticular, this file is never used when  look-
                ing  up  host  addresses;  that is under the
                control of the system gethostbyname(3)  rou-
                tine.

      HostStatusDirectory=path
                [no  short  name]  The  location of the long
                term host  status  information.   When  set,
                information about the status of hosts (e.g.,
                host down or not accepting connections) will
                be  shared  between  all sendmail processes;










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-115


                normally,  this  information  is  only  held
                within  a  single  queue  run.   This option
                requires a connection cache of at least 1 to
                function.  If the option begins with a lead-
                ing `/', it is an absolute pathname;  other-
                wise,  it  is  relative  to  the  mail queue
                directory.   A  suggested  value  for  sites
                desiring  persistent  host status is ".host-
                stat" (i.e., a  subdirectory  of  the  queue
                directory).

      IgnoreDots
                [i]  Ignore dots in incoming messages.  This
                is always disabled (that is, dots are always
                accepted) when reading SMTP mail.

      InputMailFilters=name,name,...
                A  comma  separated  list  of  filters which
                determines which filters (see the "X -- Mail
                Filter  (Milter)  Definitions"  section) and
                the invocation sequence  are  contacted  for
                incoming SMTP messages.  If none are set, no
                filters will be contacted.

      LDAPDefaultSpec=spec
                [no short name] Sets a default map  specifi-
                cation for LDAP maps.  The value should only
                contain LDAP specific settings such  as  "-h
                host  -p port -d bindDN".  The settings will
                be used for all LDAP maps unless  the  indi-
                vidual  map  specification  overrides a set-
                ting.  This option should be set before  any
                LDAP maps are defined.

      LogLevel=n
                [L] Set the log level to n.  Defaults to 9.

      Mxvalue   [no  long version] Set the macro x to value.
                This is intended only for use from the  com-
                mand line.  The -M flag is preferred.

      MailboxDatabase
                [no  short  name]  Type  of  lookup  to find
                information about local mailboxes,  defaults
                to  ``pw'' which uses getpwnam.  Other types
                can be introduced  by  adding  them  to  the
                source code, see libsm/mbdb.c for details.

      UseMSP    [no  short name] Use as mail submission pro-
                gram, i.e., allow group writable queue files
                if  the  group is the same as that of a set-
                group-ID  sendmail  binary.   See  the  file
                sendmail/SECURITY    in   the   distribution










SMM:08-116         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


                tarball.

      MatchGECOS
                [G] Allow fuzzy matching on the GECOS field.
                If this flag is set, and the usual user name
                lookups fail (that is,  there  is  no  alias
                with   this  name  and  a  getpwnam  fails),
                sequentially search the password file for  a
                matching  entry  in  the  GECOS field.  This
                also requires that MATCHGECOS be  turned  on
                during compilation.  This option is not rec-
                ommended.

      MaxAliasRecursion=N
                [no short name] The maximum depth  of  alias
                recursion (default: 10).

      MaxDaemonChildren=N
                [no short name] If set, sendmail will refuse
                connections when it has more than N children
                processing  incoming mail or automatic queue
                runs.  This does not  limit  the  number  of
                outgoing connections.  If the default Deliv-
                eryMode (background) is used, then  sendmail
                may  create  an  almost  unlimited number of
                children (depending on the number of  trans-
                actions  and the relative execution times of
                mail receiption and mail delivery).  If  the
                limit  should  be enforced, then a Delivery-
                Mode other than background must be used.  If
                not  set, there is no limit to the number of
                children -- that is, the system load average
                controls this.

      MaxHeadersLength=N
                [no  short  name]  The maximum length of the
                sum of all headers.  This  can  be  used  to
                prevent  a  denial  of  service attack.  The
                default is no limit.

      MaxHopCount=N
                [h] The maximum hop  count.   Messages  that
                have  been  processed  more than N times are
                assumed to be in a loop  and  are  rejected.
                Defaults to 25.

      MaxMessageSize=N
                [no  short name] Specify the maximum message
                size to be  advertised  in  the  ESMTP  EHLO
                response.  Messages larger than this will be
                rejected.  If set to a  value  greater  than
                zero,  that value will be listed in the SIZE
                response, otherwise SIZE  is  advertised  in










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-117


                the ESMTP EHLO response without a parameter.

      MaxMimeHeaderLength=N[/M]
                [no  short  name] Sets the maximum length of
                certain MIME header field values to N  char-
                acters.  These MIME header fields are deter-
                mined by being a member of class {checkMIME-
                TextHeaders},  which currently contains only
                the header Content-Description.  For some of
                these  headers  which  take  parameters, the
                maximum length of each parameter is set to M
                if  specified.   If /M is not specified, one
                half of N will be used.  By  default,  these
                values  are 2048 and 1024, respectively.  To
                allow any length, a value of 0 can be speci-
                fied.

      MaxNOOPCommands=N
                Override  the default of MAXNOOPCOMMANDS for
                the number of useless commands, see  Section
                "Measures    against   Denial   of   Service
                Attacks".

      MaxQueueChildren=N
                [no short name] When set,  this  limits  the
                number  of concurrent queue runner processes
                to N.  This helps to control the  amount  of
                system  resources  used  when processing the
                queue.  When there are multiple queue groups
                defined  and  the total number of queue run-
                ners for these  queue  groups  would  exceed
                MaxQueueChildren  then the queue groups will
                not all run concurrently. That is, some por-
                tion  of  the  queue groups will run concur-
                rently such that MaxQueueChildren  will  not
                be   exceeded,  while  the  remaining  queue
                groups will be run  later  (in  round  robin
                order).  See also MaxRunnersPerQueue and the
                section Queue  Group  Declaration.   Notice:
                sendmail  does  not  count  individual queue
                runners, but only sets of processes that act
                on  a workgroup.  Hence the actual number of
                queue runners may be lower  than  the  limit
                imposed  by MaxQueueChildren.  This discrep-
                ancy can be large if some queue runners have
                to  wait  for  a  slow  server  and if short
                intervals are used.

      MaxQueueRunSize=N
                [no short name] The maximum number  of  jobs
                that  will  be  processed  in a single queue
                run.  If not set, there is no limit  on  the
                size.   If  you  have very large queues or a










SMM:08-118         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


                very short queue run interval this could  be
                unstable.   However,  since the first N jobs
                in queue directory  order  are  run  (rather
                than  the  N  highest  priority  jobs)  this
                should be set as high as possible  to  avoid
                "losing"  jobs  that  happen to fall late in
                the queue directory.  Note: this option also
                restricts  the  number of entries printed by
                mailq.  That is, if MaxQueueRunSize  is  set
                to  a  value N larger than zero, then only N
                entries are printed per queue group.

      MaxRecipientsPerMessage=N
                [no short name] The maximum number of recip-
                ients  that  will be accepted per message in
                an SMTP transaction.  Note: setting this too
                low  can  interfere  with  sending mail from
                MUAs that use SMTP for  initial  submission.
                If  not set, there is no limit on the number
                of recipients per envelope.

      MaxRunnersPerQueue=N
                [no short name] This sets the default  maxi-
                mum   number  of  queue  runners  for  queue
                groups.  Up to N queue runners will work  in
                parallel  on a queue group's messages.  This
                is useful where the processing of a  message
                in  the  queue might delay the processing of
                subsequent messages. Such a delay may be the
                result of non-erroneous situations such as a
                low bandwidth connection.  May be overridden
                on  a  per  queue group basis by setting the
                Runners option; see the section Queue  Group
                Declaration.  The default is 1 when not set.

      MeToo     [m] Send to me too, even if I am in an alias
                expansion.  This option  is  deprecated  and
                will be removed from a future version.

      Milter    [no  short  name]  This  option  has several
                sub(sub)options.  The names  of  the  subop-
                tions  are  separated by dots.  At the first
                level the following options are available:


                    LogLevel   Log level for input mail filter actions, defaults to LogLevel.
                    macros     Specifies list of macro to transmit to filters.
                               See list below.

                The ``macros'' option has the following sub-
                options  which  specify the list of macro to
                transmit to milters after  a  certain  event
                occurred.










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-119


                    connect   After session connection start
                    helo      After EHLO/HELO command
                    envfrom   After MAIL From command
                    envrcpt   After RCPT To command
                    data      After DATA command.
                    eoh       After DATA command and header
                    eom       After DATA command and terminating ``.''

                By  default  the  lists of macros are empty.
                Example:


                    O Milter.LogLevel=12
                    O Milter.macros.connect=j, _, {daemon_name}


      MinFreeBlocks=N
                [b] Insist on at least N blocks free on  the
                filesystem that holds the queue files before
                accepting  email  via  SMTP.   If  there  is
                insufficient  space  sendmail  gives  a  452
                response to the MAIL command.  This  invites
                the sender to try again later.

      MaxQueueAge=age
                [no  short  name]  If this is set to a value
                greater than zero, entries in the queue will
                be  retried  during  a queue run only if the
                individual retry time has been reached which
                is  doubled  for  each attempt.  The maximum
                retry  time  is  limited  by  the  specified
                value.

      MinQueueAge=age
                [no  short  name]  Don't  process any queued
                jobs that have been in the queue  less  than
                the   indicated   time  interval.   This  is
                intended to allow you to get  responsiveness
                by  processing  the  queue fairly frequently
                without thrashing your system by trying jobs
                too  often.   The default units are minutes.
                Note: This option is ignored for queue  runs
                that  select  a  subset  of the queue, i.e.,
                "-q[!][I|R|S|Q][string]"

      MustQuoteChars=s
                [no short name] Sets the list of  characters
                that  must  be quoted if used in a full name
                that is in the phrase  part  of  a  ``phrase
                <address>''  syntax.  The default is ``'.''.
                The  characters  ``@,;:\()[]''  are   always
                added to this list.











SMM:08-120         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


      NiceQueueRun
                [no  short  name] The priority of queue run-
                ners (nice(3)).  This value must be  greater
                or equal zero.

      NoRecipientAction
                [no  short name] The action to take when you
                receive a message that has no valid  recipi-
                ent  headers (To:, Cc:, Bcc:, or Apparently-
                To: -- the last included for  back  compati-
                bility  with old sendmails).  It can be None
                to pass the  message  on  unmodified,  which
                violates  the  protocol, Add-To to add a To:
                header with any recipients it  can  find  in
                the envelope (which might expose Bcc: recip-
                ients), Add-Apparently-To to add  an  Appar-
                ently-To: header (this is only for back-com-
                patibility and  is  officially  deprecated),
                Add-To-Undisclosed  to  add  a  header  "To:
                undisclosed-recipients:;" to make the header
                legal  without  disclosing anything, or Add-
                Bcc to add an empty Bcc: header.

      OldStyleHeaders
                [o] Assume that the headers may  be  in  old
                format,  i.e.,  spaces  delimit names.  This
                actually turns on an adaptive algorithm:  if
                any  recipient  address  contains  a  comma,
                parenthesis, or angle bracket,  it  will  be
                assumed  that commas already exist.  If this
                flag is not on, only commas  delimit  names.
                Headers   are   always  output  with  commas
                between the names.  Defaults to off.

      OperatorChars=charlist
                [$o macro] The list of characters  that  are
                considered to be "operators", that is, char-
                acters that delimit  tokens.   All  operator
                characters   are   tokens   by   themselves;
                sequences  of  non-operator  characters  are
                also  tokens.   White space characters sepa-
                rate tokens but are not tokens themselves --
                for example, "AAA.BBB" has three tokens, but
                "AAA BBB" has two.  If  not  set,  Operator-
                Chars defaults to ".:@[]"; additionally, the
                characters "()<>,;"  are  always  operators.
                Note  that  OperatorChars must be set in the
                configuration file before any rulesets.

      PidFile=filename
                [no short name] Filename of  the  pid  file.
                (default  is  _PATH_SENDMAILPID).  The file-
                name is macro-expanded before it is  opened,










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-121


                and unlinked when sendmail exits.

      PostmasterCopy=postmaster
                [P] If set, copies of error messages will be
                sent to  the  named  postmaster.   Only  the
                header   of  the  failed  message  is  sent.
                Errors resulting from messages with a  nega-
                tive  precedence  will  not  be sent.  Since
                most errors are user problems, this is prob-
                ably  not  a  good  idea on large sites, and
                arguably contains all sorts of privacy  vio-
                lations,  but  it  seems  to be popular with
                certain  operating  systems  vendors.    The
                address  is  macro  expanded  at the time of
                delivery.  Defaults to no postmaster copies.

      PrivacyOptions=opt,opt,...
                [p] Set the privacy options.  ``Privacy'' is
                really  a misnomer; many of these are just a
                way of insisting on  stricter  adherence  to
                the  SMTP  protocol.   The  options  can  be
                selected from:


                    public              Allow open access
                    needmailhelo        Insist on HELO or EHLO command before MAIL
                    needexpnhelo        Insist on HELO or EHLO command before EXPN
                    noexpn              Disallow EXPN entirely, implies noverb.
                    needvrfyhelo        Insist on HELO or EHLO command before VRFY
                    novrfy              Disallow VRFY entirely
                    noetrn              Disallow ETRN entirely
                    noverb              Disallow VERB entirely
                    restrictmailq       Restrict mailq command
                    restrictqrun        Restrict -q command line flag
                    restrictexpand      Restrict -bv and -v command line flags
                    noreceipts          Don't return success DSNs[20]
                    nobodyreturn        Don't return the body of a message with DSNs
                    goaway              Disallow essentially all SMTP status queries
                    authwarnings        Put X-Authentication-Warning: headers in messages
                                        and log warnings
                    noactualrecipient   Don't put X-Actual-Recipient lines in DSNs
                                        which reveal the actual account that addresses map to.

                The  "goaway"  pseudo-flag  sets  all  flags
                except    "noreceipts",     "restrictmailq",
                "restrictqrun",  "restrictexpand", "noetrn",
                and "nobodyreturn".  If mailq is restricted,
                only  people  in the same group as the queue
____________________
   [20]N.B.: the noreceipts flag turns off support  for  RFC
1891 (Delivery Status Notification).












SMM:08-122         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


                directory can print  the  queue.   If  queue
                runs are restricted, only root and the owner
                of the queue directory can  run  the  queue.
                The  "restrictexpand"  pseudo-flag instructs
                sendmail to drop  privileges  when  the  -bv
                option  is  given  by  users who are neither
                root nor the  TrustedUser  so  users  cannot
                read private aliases, forwards, or :include:
                files.  It will add the "NonRootSafeAddr" to
                the  "DontBlameSendmail"  option  to prevent
                misleading unsafe address warnings.  It also
                overrides  the  -v  (verbose)  command  line
                option  to  prevent   information   leakage.
                Authentication  Warnings  add warnings about
                various   conditions   that   may   indicate
                attempts  to  spoof the mail system, such as
                using a non-standard queue directory.

      ProcessTitlePrefix=string
                [no short name]  Prefix  the  process  title
                shown  on  'ps'  listings  with string.  The
                string will be macro processed.

      QueueDirectory=dir
                [Q] The  QueueDirectory  option  serves  two
                purposes.  First, it specifies the directory
                or set  of  directories  that  comprise  the
                default  queue  group.  Second, it specifies
                the directory D which is the ancestor of all
                queue  directories,  and which sendmail uses
                as  its  current  working  directory.   When
                sendmail  dumps  core,  it  leaves  its core
                files in D.  There are two  cases.   If  dir
                ends      with      an     asterisk     (eg,
                /var/spool/mqueue/qd*),  then  all  of   the
                directories or symbolic links to directories
                beginning  with  `qd'  in  /var/spool/mqueue
                will  be  used  as  queue directories of the
                default queue group,  and  /var/spool/mqueue
                will  be  used  as  the working directory D.
                Otherwise, dir must name a  directory  (usu-
                ally  /var/spool/mqueue):  the default queue
                group consists of the single queue directory
                dir,  and  the working directory D is set to
                dir.  To define additional groups  of  queue
                directories,  use the configuration file `Q'
                command.  Do not change the queue  directory
                structure while sendmail is running.

      QueueFactor=factor
                [q]  Use factor as the multiplier in the map
                function to decide when  to  just  queue  up
                jobs  rather  than  run them.  This value is










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-123


                divided by the difference between  the  cur-
                rent load average and the load average limit
                (QueueLA option) to  determine  the  maximum
                message   priority   that   will   be  sent.
                Defaults to 600000.

      QueueLA=LA
                [x] When the system load average exceeds  LA
                and  the  QueueFactor  (q) option divided by
                the difference in the current  load  average
                and the QueueLA option plus one is less than
                the priority of the message, just queue mes-
                sages   (i.e.,  don't  try  to  send  them).
                Defaults to 8 multiplied by  the  number  of
                processors online on the system (if that can
                be determined).

      QueueFileMode=mode
                [no  short  name]  Default  permissions  for
                queue  files  (octal).  If not set, sendmail
                uses 0600 unless its real and effective  uid
                are different in which case it uses 0644.

      QueueSortOrder=algorithm
                [no  short name] Sets the algorithm used for
                sorting the queue.  Only the first character
                of  the  value  is  used.   Legal values are
                "host" (to order by the name  of  the  first
                host  name  of  the first recipient), "file-
                name" (to order by the  name  of  the  queue
                file  name), "time" (to order by the submis-
                sion/creation time), "random" (to order ran-
                domly), "modification" (to order by the mod-
                ification time of the qf file (older entries
                first)),  "none" (to not order), and "prior-
                ity" (to order by message  priority).   Host
                ordering  makes better use of the connection
                cache, but may tend to process low  priority
                messages  that go to a single host over high
                priority messages that go to several  hosts;
                it  probably  shouldn't be used on slow net-
                work links.  Filename and modification  time
                ordering  saves  the overhead of reading all
                of the  queued  items  before  starting  the
                queue   run.    Creation  (submission)  time
                ordering is almost always a bad idea,  since
                it  allows large, bulk mail to go out before
                smaller, personal mail, but may have  appli-
                cability  on  some hosts with very fast con-
                nections.  Random is useful if several queue
                runners  are  started  by  hand which try to
                drain the same queue  since  odds  are  they
                will  be  working  on different parts of the










SMM:08-124         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


                queue at the same time.   Priority  ordering
                is the default.

      QueueTimeout=timeout
                [T]  A  synonym  for  "Timeout.queuereturn".
                Use that form instead of the  "QueueTimeout"
                form.

      RandFile  [no short name] Name of file containing ran-
                dom data or the name of the UNIX  socket  if
                EGD  is used.  A (required) prefix "egd:" or
                "file:"  specifies   the   type.    STARTTLS
                requires  this  filename if the compile flag
                HASURANDOMDEV  is   not   set   (see   send-
                mail/README).

      ResolverOptions=options
                [I] Set resolver options.  Values can be set
                using +flag and  cleared  using  -flag;  the
                flags  can  be  "debug",  "aaonly", "usevc",
                "primary", "igntc",  "recurse",  "defnames",
                "stayopen",  "use_inet6",  or "dnsrch".  The
                string "HasWildcardMX" (without a  +  or  -)
                can   be  specified  to  turn  off  matching
                against MX records when doing name canonifi-
                cations.   The string "WorkAroundBrokenAAAA"
                (without a + or -) can be specified to  work
                around  some broken nameservers which return
                SERVFAIL (a  temporary  failure)  on  T_AAAA
                (IPv6)  lookups.  Notice: it might be neces-
                sary to apply the same (or similar)  options
                to submit.cf too.

      RequiresDirfsync
                [no  short  name] This option can be used to
                override    the    compile     time     flag
                REQUIRES_DIR_FSYNC  at runtime by setting it
                to false.  If the compile time flag  is  not
                set,  the option is ignored.  The flag turns
                on support for file systems that require  to
                call  fsync()  for  a directory if the meta-
                data in it has been changed.  This should be
                turned  on  at  least  for older versions of
                ReiserFS;  it  is  enabled  by  default  for
                Linux.   According  to some information this
                flag is not needed anymore for kernel 2.4.16
                and newer.

      RrtImpliesDsn
                [R]  If  this  option  is  set,  a  "Return-
                Receipt-To:" header causes the request of  a
                DSN, which is sent to the envelope sender as
                required by RFC 1891,  not  to  the  address










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-125


                given in the header.

      RunAsUser=user
                [no  short name] The user parameter may be a
                user name (looked up in  /etc/passwd)  or  a
                numeric   user  id;  either  form  can  have
                ":group"  attached  (where  group   can   be
                numeric  or symbolic).  If set to a non-zero
                (non-root) value, sendmail  will  change  to
                this  user  id  shortly  after  startup[21].
                This avoids  a  certain  class  of  security
                problems.   However,  this  means  that  all
                ".forward" and  ":include:"  files  must  be
                readable by the indicated user and all files
                to be written must be writable by user Also,
                all  file  and  program  deliveries  will be
                marked unsafe unless the  option  DontBlame-
                Sendmail=NonRootSafeAddr  is  set,  in which
                case the delivery will be done as user.   It
                is  also incompatible with the SafeFileEnvi-
                ronment option.  In other words, it may  not
                actually  add much to security on an average
                system, and may in fact detract  from  secu-
                rity (because other file permissions must be
                loosened).  However, it should be useful  on
                firewalls and other places where users don't
                have accounts and the aliases file  is  well
                constrained.

      RecipientFactor=fact
                [y]  The  indicated  factor  is added to the
                priority (thus lowering the priority of  the
                job)  for  each  recipient, i.e., this value
                penalizes jobs with large numbers of recipi-
                ents.  Defaults to 30000.

      RefuseLA=LA
                [X] When the system load average exceeds LA,
                refuse incoming SMTP connections.   Defaults
                to 12 multiplied by the number of processors
                online on the system (if that can be  deter-
                mined).

      RejectLogInterval=timeout
                [no  short  name] Log interval when refusing
                connections for this long (default: 3h).

____________________
   [21]When running as a daemon, it changes to this user af-
ter accepting a connection but before reading any SMTP  com-
mands.












SMM:08-126         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


      RetryFactor=fact
                [Z] The factor  is  added  to  the  priority
                every  time  a job is processed.  Thus, each
                time a job is processed, its  priority  will
                be  decreased  by  the  indicated value.  In
                most environments this should  be  positive,
                since  hosts that are down are all too often
                down for a long time.  Defaults to 90000.

      SafeFileEnvironment=dir
                [no short name] If this option is set, send-
                mail will do a chroot(2) call into the indi-
                cated  directory  before  doing   any   file
                writes.   If  the file name specified by the
                user begins with dir, that partial path name
                will be stripped off before writing, so (for
                example) if the SafeFileEnvironment variable
                is   set   to   "/safe"   then   aliases  of
                "/safe/logs/file" and "/logs/file"  actually
                indicate  the  same  file.  Additionally, if
                this option  is  set,  sendmail  refuses  to
                deliver to symbolic links.

      SaveFromLine
                [f]  Save  UNIX-style  "From"  lines  at the
                front of headers.  Normally they are assumed
                redundant and discarded.

      SendMimeErrors
                [j] If set, send error messages in MIME for-
                mat (see RFC 2045 and RFC 1344 for details).
                If  disabled,  sendmail  will not return the
                DSN keyword in response to an EHLO and  will
                not do Delivery Status Notification process-
                ing as described in RFC 1891.

      ServerCertFile
                [no short name] File containing the certifi-
                cate  of  the server, i.e., this certificate
                is used when sendmail acts as  server  (used
                for STARTTLS).

      ServerKeyFile
                [no  short name] File containing the private
                key  belonging  to  the  server  certificate
                (used for STARTTLS).

      ServerSSLOptions
                A  space  or  comma  separated  list  of SSL
                related options for the  server  side.   See
                SSL_CTX_set_options(3)   for   a  list;  the
                available values depend on the OpenSSL  ver-
                sion against which sendmail is compiled.  By










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-127


                default,  SSL_OP_ALL  -SSL_OP_TLSEXT_PADDING
                are  used  (if those options are available).
                Options can be cleared  by  preceeding  them
                with  a  minus sign.  It is also possible to
                specify numerical values, e.g., -0x0010.

      ServiceSwitchFile=filename
                [no short name] If your host operating  sys-
                tem  has a service switch abstraction (e.g.,
                /etc/nsswitch.conf     on     Solaris     or
                /etc/svc.conf  on Ultrix and DEC OSF/1) that
                service will be consulted and this option is
                ignored.   Otherwise,  this is the name of a
                file that provides the list of methods  used
                to  implement particular services.  The syn-
                tax is a series of lines, each of which is a
                sequence  of  words.   The first word is the
                service name, and following words  are  ser-
                vice types.  The services that sendmail con-
                sults directly are  "aliases"  and  "hosts."
                Service  types  can  be  "dns", "nis", "nis-
                plus", or "files" (with the caveat that  the
                appropriate  support  must  be  compiled  in
                before the service can be  referenced).   If
                ServiceSwitchFile   is   not  specified,  it
                defaults  to  /etc/mail/service.switch.   If
                that file does not exist, the default switch
                is:


                    aliases             files
                    hosts               dns nis files

                The   default   file   is    "/etc/mail/ser-
                vice.switch".

      SevenBitInput
                [7]  Strip  input to seven bits for compati-
                bility with old systems.  This shouldn't  be
                necessary.

      SharedMemoryKey
                [no short name] Key to use for shared memory
                segment; if not set (or  0),  shared  memory
                will not be used.  If set to -1 sendmail can
                select  a  key  itself  provided  that  also
                SharedMemoryKeyFile  is  set.  Requires sup-
                port for shared memory to be  compiled  into
                sendmail.   If  this option is set, sendmail
                can  share  some  data   between   different
                instances.    For  example,  the  number  of
                entries in a queue directory or  the  avail-
                able  space  in  a file system.  This allows










SMM:08-128         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


                for more efficient program execution,  since
                only  one  process  needs to update the data
                instead of each individual process gathering
                the data each time it is required.

      SharedMemoryKeyFile
                [no short name] If SharedMemoryKey is set to
                -1 then the  automatically  selected  shared
                memory  key  will be stored in the specified
                file.

      SingleLineFromHeader
                [no short name] If  set,  From:  lines  that
                have  embedded  newlines  are unwrapped onto
                one line.  This is to get around a botch  in
                Lotus  Notes  that  apparently cannot under-
                stand legally wrapped RFC 822 headers.

      SingleThreadDelivery
                [no short name] If  set,  a  client  machine
                will  never try to open two SMTP connections
                to a single server machine at the same time,
                even  in  different  processes.  That is, if
                another sendmail is already talking to  some
                host  a  new  sendmail will not open another
                connection.   This  property  is  of   mixed
                value; although this reduces the load on the
                other machine,  it  can  cause  mail  to  be
                delayed  (for  example,  if  one sendmail is
                delivering a huge message,  other  sendmails
                won't  be able to send even small messages).
                Also, it requires  another  file  descriptor
                (for  the  lock file) per connection, so you
                may have to reduce  the  ConnectionCacheSize
                option  to  avoid running out of per-process
                file descriptors.  Requires the  HostStatus-
                Directory option.

      SmtpGreetingMessage=message
                [$e macro] The message printed when the SMTP
                server starts up.  Defaults to "$j  Sendmail
                $v ready at $b".

      SoftBounce
                If set, issue temporary errors (4xy) instead
                of permanent errors (5xy).  This can be use-
                ful during testing of a new configuration to
                avoid erroneous bouncing of mails.

      StatusFile=file
                [S] Log  summary  statistics  in  the  named
                file.   If  no file name is specified, "sta-
                tistics" is used.  If not  set,  no  summary










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-129


                statistics  are  saved.   This file does not
                grow in size.  It can be printed  using  the
                mailstats(8) program.

      SuperSafe [s]  This  option can be set to True, False,
                Interactive, or PostMilter.  If set to True,
                sendmail  will  be  super-safe  when running
                things, i.e., always instantiate  the  queue
                file, even if you are going to attempt imme-
                diate delivery.  Sendmail  always  instanti-
                ates the queue file before returning control
                to the client under any circumstances.  This
                should  really  always  be set to True.  The
                Interactive value  has  been  introduced  in
                8.12 and can be used together with Delivery-
                Mode=i.  It skips some synchronization calls
                which  are  effectively  doubled in the code
                execution path for this  mode.   If  set  to
                PostMilter,  sendmail  defers  synchronizing
                the queue file until any milters  have  sig-
                naled acceptance of the message.  PostMilter
                is useful only when sendmail is  running  as
                an  SMTP  server; in all other situations it
                acts the same as True.

      TLSSrvOptions
                [no short name] List  of  options  for  SMTP
                STARTTLS for the server consisting of single
                characters with intervening white  space  or
                commas.  The flag ``V'' disables client ver-
                ification, and hence it is not  possible  to
                use  a client certificate for relaying.  The
                flag ``C'' removes the requirement  for  the
                TLS  server to have a cert.  This only works
                under very specific circumstances and should
                only  be used if the consequences are under-
                stood, e.g., clients may  not  work  with  a
                server using this.

      TempFileMode=mode
                [F]  The  file  mode  for  transcript files,
                files to which sendmail  delivers  directly,
                files  in  the HostStatusDirectory, and Sta-
                tusFile.  It  is  interpreted  in  octal  by
                default.  Defaults to 0600.

      Timeout.type=timeout
                [r; subsumes old T option as well] Set time-
                out values.  For more information, see  sec-
                tion 4.1.

      TimeZoneSpec=tzinfo
                [t]  Set  the local time zone info to tzinfo










SMM:08-130         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


                -- for  example,  "PST8PDT".   Actually,  if
                this is not set, the TZ environment variable
                is cleared (so the system default is  used);
                if  set  but null, the user's TZ variable is
                used, and if set and non-null the  TZ  vari-
                able is set to this value.

      TrustedUser=user
                [no  short name] The user parameter may be a
                user name (looked up in  /etc/passwd)  or  a
                numeric user id.  Trusted user for file own-
                ership and starting  the  daemon.   If  set,
                generated  alias  databases  and the control
                socket (if configured) will automatically be
                owned by this user.

      TryNullMXList
                [w]  If  this system is the "best" (that is,
                lowest preference) MX for a given host,  its
                configuration  rules  should normally detect
                this situation and treat that condition spe-
                cially  by  forwarding  the  mail  to a UUCP
                feed, treating it  as  local,  or  whatever.
                However,  in  some  cases  (such as Internet
                firewalls) you may want to  try  to  connect
                directly to that host as though it had no MX
                records at all.  Setting this option  causes
                sendmail  to try this.  The downside is that
                errors in your configuration are  likely  to
                be  diagnosed  as "host unknown" or "message
                timed out" instead of something  more  mean-
                ingful.  This option is disrecommended.

      UnixFromLine=fromline
                [$l  macro]  Defines  the  format  used when
                sendmail must add a  UNIX-style  From_  line
                (that      is,      a     line     beginning
                "From<space>user").  Defaults  to  "From  $g
                $d".   Don't  change this unless your system
                uses a different UNIX mailbox  format  (very
                unlikely).

      UnsafeGroupWrites
                [no  short name] If set (default), :include:
                and .forward files that are  group  writable
                are  considered "unsafe", that is, they can-
                not reference programs or write directly  to
                files.   World  writable :include: and .for-
                ward files are  always  unsafe.   Note:  use
                DontBlameSendmail  instead;  this  option is
                deprecated.












Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-131


      UseCompressedIPv6Addresses
                [no short name] If set, the compressed  for-
                mat  of  IPv6  addresses,  such as IPV6:::1,
                will be used, instead  of  the  uncompressed
                format, such as IPv6:0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1.

      UseErrorsTo
                [l] If there is an "Errors-To:" header, send
                error  messages  to  the  addresses   listed
                there.   They  normally  go  to the envelope
                sender.  Use of this option causes  sendmail
                to violate RFC 1123.  This option is disrec-
                ommended and deprecated.

      UserDatabaseSpec=udbspec
                [U] The user database specification.

      Verbose   [v] Run in verbose mode.  If  this  is  set,
                sendmail  adjusts options HoldExpensive (old
                c) and DeliveryMode (old d) so that all mail
                is  delivered  completely in a single job so
                that  you  can  see  the   entire   delivery
                process.  Option Verbose should never be set
                in the configuration file;  it  is  intended
                for  command  line  use only.  Note that the
                use of option Verbose can cause  authentica-
                tion information to leak, if you use a send-
                mail client to authenticate to a server.  If
                the authentication mechanism uses plain text
                passwords (as with LOGIN or PLAIN), then the
                password  could  be  compromised.   To avoid
                this, do not  install  sendmail  set-user-ID
                root, and disable the VERB SMTP command with
                a suitable PrivacyOptions setting.

      XscriptFileBufferSize=threshold
                [no short name] Set the threshold, in bytes,
                before  a memory-based queue transcript file
                becomes disk-based.   The  default  is  4096
                bytes.

      All options can be specified on the command line using
      the -O or -o flag, but most  will  cause  sendmail  to
      relinquish  its  set-user-ID permissions.  The options
      that will not cause this are SevenBitInput [7], Eight-
      BitMode  [8],  MinFreeBlocks  [b],  CheckpointInterval
      [C], DeliveryMode [d], ErrorMode [e], IgnoreDots  [i],
      SendMimeErrors [j], LogLevel [L], MeToo [m], OldStyle-
      Headers [o], PrivacyOptions [p], SuperSafe  [s],  Ver-
      bose [v], QueueSortOrder, MinQueueAge, DefaultCharSet,
      Dial    Delay,    NoRecipientAction,    ColonOkInAddr,
      MaxQueueRunSize,  SingleLineFromHeader,  and  AllowBo-
      gusHELO.  Actually, PrivacyOptions [p]  given  on  the










SMM:08-132         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


      command  line  are added to those already specified in
      the sendmail.cf  file,  i.e.,  they  can't  be  reset.
      Also, M (define macro) when defining the r or s macros
      is also considered "safe".

   5.7.  P -- Precedence Definitions

           Values for the "Precedence:" field may be defined
      using  the  P  control line.  The syntax of this field
      is:


          Pname=num

      When the name is found in a "Precedence:"  field,  the
      message  class  is  set  to  num.  Higher numbers mean
      higher precedence.  Numbers less than  zero  have  the
      special  property  that if an error occurs during pro-
      cessing the body of the message will not be  returned;
      this  is  expected  to be used for "bulk" mail such as
      through mailing  lists.   The  default  precedence  is
      zero.  For example, our list of precedences is:


          Pfirst-class=0
          Pspecial-delivery=100
          Plist=-30
          Pbulk=-60
          Pjunk=-100

      People  writing  mailing list exploders are encouraged
      to use "Precedence: list".  Older versions of sendmail
      (which discarded all error returns for negative prece-
      dences)  didn't  recognize  this  name,  giving  it  a
      default  precedence  of  zero.  This allows list main-
      tainers to see error returns on both old and new  ver-
      sions of sendmail.

   5.8.  V -- Configuration Version Level

           To  provide  compatibility with old configuration
      files, the V line has been added to define  some  very
      basic  semantics of the configuration file.  These are
      not intended to be long term  supports;  rather,  they
      describe compatibility features which will probably be
      removed in future releases.

           N.B.: these version levels  have  nothing  to  do
      with the version number on the files.  For example, as
      of this writing version 10 config files (specifically,
      8.10) used version level 9 configurations.












Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-133


           "Old"  configuration files are defined as version
      level one.  Version level two files make the following
      changes:

       (1)   Host  name canonification ($[ ... $]) appends a
             dot if the name is recognized; this  gives  the
             config  file  a  way of finding out if anything
             matched.  (Actually, this just initializes  the
             "host"  map  with  the  "-a."   flag -- you can
             reset it to anything you  prefer  by  declaring
             the map explicitly.)

       (2)   Default   host  name  extension  is  consistent
             throughout processing; version level  one  con-
             figurations  turned  off domain extension (that
             is, adding the local domain name)  during  cer-
             tain  points  in processing.  Version level two
             configurations are expected to include a trail-
             ing  dot  to  indicate that the name is already
             canonical.

       (3)   Local names that are  not  aliases  are  passed
             through  a new distinguished ruleset five; this
             can be used to  append  a  local  relay.   This
             behavior  can  be  prevented  by  resolving the
             local name with an initial `@'.  That is, some-
             thing  that  resolves  to  a local mailer and a
             user name of "vikki"  will  be  passed  through
             ruleset  five, but a user name of "@vikki" will
             have the  `@'  stripped,  will  not  be  passed
             through  ruleset  five,  but  will otherwise be
             treated the same as  the  prior  example.   The
             expectation  is  that  this  might  be  used to
             implement a policy where mail sent  to  "vikki"
             was  handled by a central hub, but mail sent to
             "vikki@localhost" was delivered directly.

           Version level three files allow # initiated  com-
      ments  on all lines.  Exceptions are backslash escaped
      # marks and the $# syntax.

           Version level four configurations are  completely
      equivalent to level three for historical reasons.

           Version level five configuration files change the
      default definition of $w to be just the  first  compo-
      nent of the hostname.

           Version level six configuration files change many
      of the local processing options (such as aliasing  and
      matching  the beginning of the address for `|' charac-
      ters) to be mailer  flags;  this  allows  fine-grained
      control  over the special local processing.  Level six










SMM:08-134         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


      configuration files may also use  long  option  names.
      The  ColonOkInAddr  option  (to  allow  colons  in the
      local-part of addresses) defaults on  for  lower  num-
      bered  configuration  files;  the  configuration  file
      requires some additional intelligence to properly han-
      dle the RFC 822 group construct.

           Version  level seven configuration files used new
      option names to replace old macros  ($e  became  Smtp-
      GreetingMessage, $l became UnixFromLine, and $o became
      OperatorChars.  Also, prior to version seven, the  F=q
      flag  (use  250  instead  of 252 return value for SMTP
      VRFY commands) was assumed.

           Version level eight configuration files allow  $#
      on the left hand side of ruleset lines.

           Version  level  nine  configuration  files  allow
      parentheses in rulesets, i.e. they are not treated  as
      comments and hence removed.

           Version level ten configuration files allow queue
      group definitions.

           The V line may have an optional /vendor to  indi-
      cate  that  this configuration file uses modifications
      specific  to  a  particular  vendor[22].   You may use
      "/Berkeley" to emphasize that this configuration  file
      uses the Berkeley dialect of sendmail.

   5.9.  K -- Key File Declaration

           Special maps can be defined using the line:


          Kmapname mapclass arguments

      The  mapname is the handle by which this map is refer-
      enced in the rewriting rules.   The  mapclass  is  the
      name  of a type of map; these are compiled in to send-
      mail.  The arguments are interpreted depending on  the
      class;  typically,  there  would  be a single argument
      naming the file containing the map.

           Maps are referenced using the syntax:

____________________
   [22]And of course, vendors are encouraged  to  add  them-
selves to the list of recognized vendors by editing the rou-
tine setvendor in  conf.c.   Please  send  e-mail  to  send-
mail@Sendmail.ORG to register your vendor dialect.












Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-135


          $( map key $@ arguments $: default $)

      where either or both of the arguments or default  por-
      tion may be omitted.  The $@ arguments may appear more
      than once.  The indicated key and arguments are passed
      to  the appropriate mapping function.  If it returns a
      value, it replaces the input.  If it does not return a
      value  and  the  default  is  specified,  the  default
      replaces  the  input.    Otherwise,   the   input   is
      unchanged.

           The arguments are passed to the map for arbitrary
      use.  Most map classes can interpolate these arguments
      into  their values using the syntax "%n" (where n is a
      digit) to indicate the corresponding argument.   Argu-
      ment  "%0"  indicates  the database key.  For example,
      the rule


          R$- ! $+       $: $(uucp $1 $@ $2 $: $2 @ $1 . UUCP $)

      Looks up the UUCP name in a (user defined)  UUCP  map;
      if not found it turns it into ".UUCP" form.  The data-
      base might contain records like:


          decvax         %1@%0.DEC.COM
          research       %1@%0.ATT.COM

      Note that default clauses never do this mapping.

           The built-in map with both name and class  "host"
      is  the  host name canonicalization lookup.  Thus, the
      syntax:


          $(host hostname$)

      is equivalent to:


          $[hostname$]


           There are many defined classes.

      dbm       Database lookups using the ndbm(3)  library.
                Sendmail must be compiled with NDBM defined.

      btree     Database  lookups  using the btree interface
                to the Berkeley DB library.   Sendmail  must
                be compiled with NEWDB defined.











SMM:08-136         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


      hash      Database lookups using the hash interface to
                the Berkeley DB library.  Sendmail  must  be
                compiled with NEWDB defined.

      nis       NIS lookups.  Sendmail must be compiled with
                NIS defined.

      nisplus   NIS+ lookups.   Sendmail  must  be  compiled
                with  NISPLUS  defined.  The argument is the
                name of the table to use  for  lookups,  and
                the  -k  and -v flags may be used to set the
                key and value columns respectively.

      hesiod    Hesiod lookups.  Sendmail must  be  compiled
                with HESIOD defined.

      ldap      LDAP  X500 directory lookups.  Sendmail must
                be compiled with LDAPMAP defined.   The  map
                supports  most of the standard arguments and
                most of the command line  arguments  of  the
                ldapsearch  program.  Note that, by default,
                if a single query matches  multiple  values,
                only the first value will be returned unless
                the -z (value separator) map  flag  is  set.
                Also,  the -1 map flag will treat a multiple
                value return as if there were no matches.

      netinfo   NeXT NetInfo lookups.  Sendmail must be com-
                piled with NETINFO defined.

      text      Text  file  lookups.  The format of the text
                file is defined by the -k  (key  field  num-
                ber), -v (value field number), and -z (field
                delimiter) flags.

      ph        PH query map.  Contributed and supported  by
                Mark Roth, roth@uiuc.edu.  For more informa-
                tion,  consult  the  web  site  "http://www-
                dev.cites.uiuc.edu/sendmail/".

      nsd       nsd map for IRIX 6.5 and later.  Contributed
                and  supported  by   Bob   Mende   of   SGI,
                mende@sgi.com.

      stab      Internal  symbol table lookups.  Used inter-
                nally for aliasing.

      implicit  Really should be called "alias" --  this  is
                used  to  get  the default lookups for alias
                files, and is the default  if  no  class  is
                specified for alias files.












Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-137


      user      Looks  up  users  using getpwnam(3).  The -v
                flag can be used to specify the name of  the
                field  to  return (although this is normally
                used only to check the existence of a user).

      host      Canonifies host domain names.  Given a  host
                name  it  calls  the name server to find the
                canonical name for that host.

      bestmx    Returns the best MX record for a  host  name
                given  as  the  key.  The current machine is
                always preferred -- that is, if the  current
                machine is one of the hosts listed as a low-
                est-preference MX record, then  it  will  be
                guaranteed to be returned.  This can be used
                to find out if this machine  is  the  target
                for  an  MX record, and mail can be accepted
                on that basis.  If the  -z  flag  is  given,
                then all MX names are returned, separated by
                the given delimiter.

      dns       This map requires the option -R  to  specify
                the  DNS resource record type to lookup. The
                following  types  are  supported:  A,  AAAA,
                AFSDB,  CNAME, MX, NS, PTR, SRV, and TXT.  A
                map lookup  will  return  only  one  record.
                Hence  for some types, e.g., MX records, the
                return value might be a  random  element  of
                the  list  due  to  randomizing  in  the DNS
                resolver.

      arpa      Returns the ``reverse''  for  the  given  IP
                (IPv4 or IPv6) address, i.e., the string for
                the  PTR  lookup,   but   without   trailing
                ip6.arpa  or in-addr.arpa.  For example, the
                following configuration lines:


                    Karpa arpa
                    SArpa
                    R$+            $: $(arpa $1 $)

                work like this in test mode:


                    sendmail -bt
                    ADDRESS TEST MODE (ruleset 3 NOT automatically invoked)
                    Enter <ruleset> <address>
                    > Arpa IPv6:1:2:dead:beef:9876:0:0:1
                    Arpa               input: IPv6 : 1 : 2 : dead : beef : 9876 : 0 : 0 : 1
                    Arpa             returns: 1 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 6 . 7 . 8 . 9 . f . e . e . b . d . a . e . d . 2 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 1 . 0 . 0 . 0
                    > Arpa 1.2.3.4
                    Arpa               input: 1 . 2 . 3 . 4










SMM:08-138         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


                    Arpa             returns: 4 . 3 . 2 . 1


      sequence  The arguments on the `K' line are a list  of
                maps;  the  resulting map searches the argu-
                ment maps in order until it  finds  a  match
                for  the indicated key.  For example, if the
                key definition is:


                    Kmap1 ...
                    Kmap2 ...
                    Kseqmap sequence map1 map2

                then a lookup against "seqmap" first does  a
                lookup  in  map1.   If  that  is  found,  it
                returns immediately.   Otherwise,  the  same
                key is used for map2.

      syslog    the  key  is  logged  via  syslogd(8).   The
                lookup returns the empty string.

      switch    Much like the "sequence" map except that the
                order  of  maps is determined by the service
                switch.  The argument is  the  name  of  the
                service to be looked up; the values from the
                service switch are appended to the map  name
                to  create new map names.  For example, con-
                sider the key definition:


                    Kali switch aliases

                together with the service switch entry:


                    aliases        nis files

                This causes a query against the map "ali" to
                search  maps named "ali.nis" and "ali.files"
                in that order.

      dequote   Strip double quotes (")  from  a  name.   It
                does  not  strip  backslashes,  and will not
                strip quotes if the resulting  string  would
                contain  unscannable  syntax (that is, basic
                errors like unbalanced angle brackets;  more
                sophisticated  errors  such as unknown hosts
                are not checked).  The  intent  is  for  use
                when trying to accept mail from systems such
                as DECnet that routinely  quote  odd  syntax
                such as











Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-139


                    "49ers::ubell"

                A typical usage is probably something like:


                    Kdequote dequote

                    ...

                    R$-            $: $(dequote $1 $)
                    R$- $+         $: $>3 $1 $2

                Care  must  be  taken  to prevent unexpected
                results; for example,


                    "|someprogram < input > output"

                will have quotes stripped, but the result is
                probably  not  what you had in mind.  Fortu-
                nately these cases are rare.

      regex     The map definition on the K line contains  a
                regular  expression.   Any key input is com-
                pared to that  expression  using  the  POSIX
                regular   expressions   routines  regcomp(),
                regerr(), and regexec().  Refer to the docu-
                mentation for those routines for more infor-
                mation about the regular  expression  match-
                ing.  No rewriting of the key is done if the
                -m flag is used.  Without  it,  the  key  is
                discarded  or  if  -s if used, it is substi-
                tuted by the substring matches, delimited by
                $|  or  the string specified with the the -d
                flag.  The flags available for the map are


                    -n  not
                    -f  case sensitive
                    -b  basic regular expressions (default is extended)
                    -s  substring match
                    -d  set the delimiter used for -s
                    -a  append string to key
                    -m  match only, do not replace/discard value
                    -D  perform no lookup in deferred delivery mode.

                The -s flag can include an optional  parame-
                ter  which  can  be  used to select the sub-
                strings in the result of  the  lookup.   For
                example,


                    -s1,3,4










SMM:08-140         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


                Notes: to match a $ in a string, \$$ must be
                used.  If the pattern contains spaces,  they
                must be replaced with the blank substitution
                character, unless it is space itself.

      program   The arguments on the K line are the pathname
                to  a  program and any initial parameters to
                be passed.  When the map is called, the  key
                is  added  to the initial parameters and the
                program is invoked as the default user/group
                id.   The  first  line of standard output is
                returned as the value of the  lookup.   This
                has  many  potential  security problems, and
                has terrible performance; it should be  used
                only when absolutely necessary.

      macro     Set or clear a macro value.  To set a macro,
                pass the value as the first argument in  the
                map  lookup.   To clear a macro, do not pass
                an argument in  the  map  lookup.   The  map
                always returns the empty string.  Example of
                typical usage include:


                    Kstorage macro

                    ...

                    # set macro ${MyMacro} to the ruleset match
                    R$+ $: $(storage {MyMacro} $@ $1 $) $1
                    # set macro ${MyMacro} to an empty string
                    R$* $: $(storage {MyMacro} $@ $) $1
                    # clear macro ${MyMacro}
                    R$- $: $(storage {MyMacro} $) $1


      arith     Perform simple arithmetic  operations.   The
                operation  is  given as key, currently +, -,
                *, /, %, |, & (bitwise OR, AND), l (for less
                than),  =, and r (for random) are supported.
                The two operands  are  given  as  arguments.
                The  lookup returns the result of the compu-
                tation, i.e., TRUE or FALSE for comparisons,
                integer  values  otherwise.   The r operator
                returns a pseudo-random number  whose  value
                lies  between  the  first and second operand
                (which requires that the  first  operand  is
                smaller than the second).  All options which
                are possible for maps are ignored.  A simple
                example is:













Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-141


                    Kcomp arith

                    ...

                    Scheck_etrn
                    R$* $: $(comp l $@ $&{load_avg} $@ 7 $) $1
                    RFALSE$# error ...


      socket    The  socket  map uses a simple request/reply
                protocol over TCP or UNIX domain sockets  to
                query an external server.  Both requests and
                replies are text based and encoded  as  net-
                strings,   i.e.,   a  string  "hello  there"
                becomes:


                    11:hello there,

                Note: neither requests nor replies end  with
                CRLF.

                The  request  consists  of  the database map
                name and the lookup key separated by a space
                character:



                    <mapname> ' ' <key>


                The  server responds with a status indicator
                and the result (if any):



                    <status> ' ' <result>


                The status indicator specifies the result of
                the  lookup  operation  itself and is one of
                the following upper case words:


                    OK       the key was found, result contains the looked up value
                    NOTFOUND the key was not found, the result is empty
                    TEMP     a temporary failure occured
                    TIMEOUT  a timeout occured on the server side
                    PERM     a permanent failure occured


                In case of errors (status TEMP,  TIMEOUT  or
                PERM)   the  result  field  may  contain  an










SMM:08-142         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


                explanatory message.  However, the  explana-
                tory  message  is  not  used  any further by
                sendmail.

                Example replies:


                    31:OK resolved.address@example.com,




                    56:OK error:550 5.7.1 User does not accept mail from sender,


                in case of successful lookups, or:


                    8:NOTFOUND,


                in case the key was not found, or:


                    55:TEMP this text explains that we had a temporary failure,


                in case of a temporary map lookup failure.

                The socket map uses the same syntax as  mil-
                ters (see Section "X -- Mail Filter (Milter)
                Definitions") to  specify  the  remote  end-
                point, e.g.,


                    Ksocket mySocketMap inet:12345@127.0.0.1


                If  multiple  socket  maps  define  the same
                remote endpoint, they will  share  a  single
                connection to this endpoint.

           Most  of  these  accept  as  arguments  the  same
      optional flags and a filename (or a mapname  for  NIS;
      the filename is the root of the database path, so that
      ".db" or some  other  extension  appropriate  for  the
      database type will be added to get the actual database
      name).  Known flags are:

      -o        Indicates that this map is optional --  that
                is, if it cannot be opened, no error is pro-
                duced, and sendmail will behave  as  if  the
                map existed but was empty.










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-143


      -N, -O    If  neither -N or -O are specified, sendmail
                uses an adaptive algorithm to decide whether
                or  not to look for null bytes on the end of
                keys.  It starts by trying both; if it finds
                any  key  with  a  null  byte it never tries
                again without a null byte  and  vice  versa.
                If  -N is specified it never tries without a
                null byte and if -O is  specified  it  never
                tries  with  a  null  byte.   Setting one of
                these can speed matches but are never neces-
                sary.   If  both  -N  and  -O are specified,
                sendmail will never try any matches  at  all
                -- that is, everything will appear to fail.

      -ax       Append  the  string x on successful matches.
                For example, the default host map appends  a
                dot on successful matches.

      -Tx       Append  the  string x on temporary failures.
                For example, x would be appended  if  a  DNS
                lookup  returned  "server  failed" or an NIS
                lookup could not locate a server.  See  also
                the -t flag.

      -f        Do not fold upper to lower case before look-
                ing up the key.

      -m        Match only (without  replacing  the  value).
                If  you  only  care about the existence of a
                key and not the value  (as  you  might  when
                searching  the  NIS  map  "hosts.byname" for
                example), this flag prevents  the  map  from
                substituting  the  value.   However,  The -a
                argument is still appended on a  match,  and
                the  default  is  still  taken  if the match
                fails.

      -kkeycol  The key column name  (for  NIS+)  or  number
                (for  text  lookups).  For LDAP maps this is
                an  LDAP  filter  string  in  which  %s   is
                replaced  with  the  literal contents of the
                lookup key and %0 is replaced with the  LDAP
                escaped contents of the lookup key according
                to RFC 2254.  If the flag -K is  used,  then
                %1  through  %9  are  replaced with the LDAP
                escaped contents of the arguments  specified
                in the map lookup.

      -vvalcol  The  value  column name (for NIS+) or number
                (for text lookups).  For LDAP maps  this  is
                the  name  of  one  or more attributes to be
                returned; multiple attributes can  be  sepa-
                rated  by  commas.   If  not  specified, all










SMM:08-144         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


                attributes  found  in  the  match  will   be
                returned.   The  attributes  listed can also
                include a type and one or  more  objectClass
                values for matching as described in the LDAP
                section.

      -zdelim   The column delimiter (for text lookups).  It
                can be a single character or one of the spe-
                cial strings "\n" or "\t" to  indicate  new-
                line   or   tab  respectively.   If  omitted
                entirely,  the  column  separator   is   any
                sequence of white space.  For LDAP maps this
                is the separator character to combine multi-
                ple  values into a single return string.  If
                not set, the LDAP lookup  will  only  return
                the first match found.  For DNS maps this is
                the separator character at which the  result
                of a query is cut off if is too long.

      -t        Normally, when a map attempts to do a lookup
                and  the  server   fails   (e.g.,   sendmail
                couldn't  contact  any  name server; this is
                not the same as an entry not being found  in
                the  map),  the  message  being processed is
                queued for future processing.  The  -t  flag
                turns  off this behavior, letting the tempo-
                rary failure (server down) act as though  it
                were  a permanent failure (entry not found).
                It is particularly useful for  DNS  lookups,
                where   someone  else's  misconfigured  name
                server can cause problems on  your  machine.
                However,  care  must be taken to ensure that
                you don't bounce mail that would be resolved
                correctly  if  you  tried  again.   A common
                strategy is to forward such mail to another,
                possibly better connected, mail server.

      -D        Perform no lookup in deferred delivery mode.
                This flag is set by  default  for  the  host
                map.

      -Sspacesub
                The  character to use to replace space char-
                acters after a successful map  lookup  (esp.
                useful for regex and syslog maps).

      -sspacesub
                For  the  dequote map only, the character to
                use to replace space characters after a suc-
                cessful dequote.

      -q        Don't dequote the key before lookup.











Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-145


      -Llevel   For  the  syslog  map only, it specifies the
                level to use for the syslog call.

      -A        When rebuilding an alias file, the  -A  flag
                causes duplicate entries in the text version
                to be merged.  For example, two entries:


                    list:    user1, user2
                    list:    user3

                would be treated as though it were the  sin-
                gle entry


                    list:    user1, user2, user3

                in the presence of the -A flag.

           Some  additional flags are available for the host
      and dns maps:

      -d        delay: specify the resolver's retransmission
                time interval (in seconds).

      -r        retry:   specify  the  number  of  times  to
                retransmit a resolver query.

           The dns map has another flag:

      -B        basedomain: specify a domain that is  always
                appended to queries.

           Socket maps have an optional flag:

      -d        timeout:  specify  the  timeout (in seconds)
                for  communication  with  the   socket   map
                server.

           The following additional flags are present in the
      ldap map only:

      -R        Do not auto chase referrals.  sendmail  must
                be  compiled  with  -DLDAP_REFERRALS  to use
                this flag.

      -n        Retrieve attribute names only.

      -Vsep     Retrieve both attributes name and  value(s),
                separated by sep.

      -rderef   Set  the  alias dereference option to one of
                never, always, search, or find.










SMM:08-146         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


      -sscope   Set search scope to one of  base,  one  (one
                level), or sub (subtree).

      -hhost    LDAP  server  hostname.  Some LDAP libraries
                allow you to specify  multiple,  space-sepa-
                rated  hosts  for  redundancy.  In addition,
                each of the hosts listed can be followed  by
                a  colon  and  a port number to override the
                default LDAP port.

      -pport    LDAP service port.

      -H LDAPURI
                Use the specified LDAP URI instead of speci-
                fying  the hostname and port separately with
                the the -h and -p options shown above.   For
                example,


                    -h server.example.com -p 389 -b dc=example,dc=com

                is equivalent to


                    -H ldap://server.example.com:389 -b dc=example,dc=com

                If  the  LDAP  library supports it, the LDAP
                URI format however  can  also  request  LDAP
                over   SSL  by  using  ldaps://  instead  of
                ldap://.  For example:


                    O LDAPDefaultSpec=-H ldaps://ldap.example.com -b dc=example,dc=com

                Similarly, if the LDAP library supports  it,
                It can also be used to specify a UNIX domain
                socket using ldapi://:


                    O LDAPDefaultSpec=-H ldapi://socketfile -b dc=example,dc=com


      -bbase    LDAP search base.

      -ltimelimit
                Time limit for LDAP queries.

      -Zsizelimit
                Size (number of matches) limit for  LDAP  or
                DNS queries.

      -ddistinguished_name
                The  distinguished  name  to use to login to










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-147


                the LDAP server.

      -Mmethod  The  method  to  authenticate  to  the  LDAP
                server.   Should  be  one of LDAP_AUTH_NONE,
                LDAP_AUTH_SIMPLE, or LDAP_AUTH_KRBV4.

      -Ppasswordfile
                The file containing the secret key  for  the
                LDAP_AUTH_SIMPLE  authentication  method  or
                the name of the  Kerberos  ticket  file  for
                LDAP_AUTH_KRBV4.

      -1        Force  LDAP  searches  to  only succeed if a
                single match is found.  If  multiple  values
                are  found,  the  search is treated as if no
                match was found.

      -wversion Set the LDAP API/protocol  version  to  use.
                The  default  depends  on  the  LDAP  client
                libraries in use.  For example,  -w  3  will
                cause  sendmail  to use LDAPv3 when communi-
                cating with the LDAP server.

      -K        Treat the LDAP search key as  multi-argument
                and  replace  %1  through %9 in the key with
                the LDAP  escaped  contents  of  the  lookup
                arguments specified in the map lookup.

           The dbm map appends the strings ".pag" and ".dir"
      to the given filename; the hash and btree maps  append
      ".db".  For example, the map specification


          Kuucp dbm -o -N /etc/mail/uucpmap

      specifies an optional map named "uucp" of class "dbm";
      it always has null bytes at the end of  every  string,
      and       the       data       is      located      in
      /etc/mail/uucpmap.{dir,pag}.

           The program makemap(8) can be used to  build  any
      of  the  three  database-oriented  maps.  It takes the
      following flags:

      -f        Do not fold upper to lower case in the map.

      -N        Include null bytes in keys.

      -o        Append to an existing (old) file.

      -r        Allow replacement  of  existing  keys;  nor-
                mally,  re-inserting  an  existing key is an
                error.










SMM:08-148         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


      -v        Print what is happening.

      The sendmail daemon does not have to be  restarted  to
      read the new maps as long as you change them in place;
      file locking is used so that the maps  won't  be  read
      while they are being updated.

           New classes can be added in the routine setupmaps
      in file conf.c.

   5.10.  Q -- Queue Group Declaration

           In addition to the option  QueueDirectory,  queue
      groups  can be declared that define a (group of) queue
      directories under a common name.   The  syntax  is  as
      follows:


          Qname {, field=value}+

      where  name  is  the  symbolic name of the queue group
      under which it can be referenced in various places and
      the "field=value" pairs define attributes of the queue
      group.  The name must  only  consist  of  alphanumeric
      characters.  Fields are:

      Flags     Flags for this queue group.

      Nice      The  nice(2)  increment for the queue group.
                This value must be greater or equal zero.

      Interval  The time between two queue runs.

      Path      The queue directory of the group (required).

      Runners   The number of  parallel  runners  processing
                the  queue.   Note  that  F=f must be set if
                this value is greater than one.

      Jobs      The maximum number of jobs (messages  deliv-
                ered) per queue run.

      recipients
                The  maximum  number of recipients per enve-
                lope.  Envelopes with more than this  number
                of  recipients  will  be split into multiple
                envelopes in the same queue directory.   The
                default value 0 means no limit.

      Only the first character of the field name is checked.

           By default, a queue group named mqueue is defined
      that uses the value of the  QueueDirectory  option  as










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-149


      path.   Notice:  all  paths  that  are  used for queue
      groups  must  be  subdirectories  of   QueueDirectory.
      Since  they  can  be symbolic links, this isn't a real
      restriction, If QueueDirectory uses a  wildcard,  then
      the  directory one level up is considered the ``base''
      directory  which  all  other  queue  directories  must
      share.  Please make sure that the queue directories do
      not overlap, e.g., do not specify


          O QueueDirectory=/var/spool/mqueue/*
          Qone, P=/var/spool/mqueue/dir1
          Qtwo, P=/var/spool/mqueue/dir2

      because this also includes "dir1" and  "dir2"  in  the
      default queue group.  However,


          O QueueDirectory=/var/spool/mqueue/main*
          Qone, P=/var/spool/mqueue/dir
          Qtwo, P=/var/spool/mqueue/other*

      is a valid queue group specification.

           Options listed in the ``Flags'' field can be used
      to modify the behavior of a queue  group.   The  ``f''
      flag  must  be  set if multiple queue runners are sup-
      posed to work on the entries in a queue group.  Other-
      wise  sendmail  will  work  on  the  entries  strictly
      sequentially.

           The ``Interval''  field  sets  the  time  between
      queue  runs.   If  no queue group specific interval is
      set, then the parameter of the -q option from the com-
      mand line is used.

           To  control  the  overall  number of concurrently
      active queue runners the option  MaxQueueChildren  can
      be  set.  This limits the number of processes used for
      running the queues to MaxQueueChildren, though at  any
      one  time fewer processes may be active as a result of
      queue options, completed queue runs, system load, etc.

           The maximum number of queue runners for an  indi-
      vidual  queue  group can be controlled via the Runners
      option.  If set to 0, entries in the queue will not be
      processed,  which  is  useful  to ``quarantine'' queue
      files.  The number of runners per queue group may also
      be  set  with  the  option  MaxRunnersPerQueue,  which
      applies to queue groups that have no individual limit.
      That  is,  the  default  value  for Runners is MaxRun-
      nersPerQueue if set, otherwise 1.











SMM:08-150         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


           The field Jobs describes the  maximum  number  of
      jobs  (messages delivered) per queue run, which is the
      queue group specific value of MaxQueueRunSize.

           Notice: queue groups should be declared after all
      queue  related  options  have  been  set because queue
      groups take their defaults from those options.  If  an
      option  is  set  after  a queue group declaration, the
      values of options in the queue group are  set  to  the
      defaults of sendmail unless explicitly set in the dec-
      laration.

           Each envelope is assigned to a queue group  based
      on  the  algorithm described in section ``Queue Groups
      and Queue Directories''.

   5.11.  X -- Mail Filter (Milter) Definitions

           The sendmail Mail Filter API (Milter) is designed
      to  allow third-party programs access to mail messages
      as they are being processed in order to  filter  meta-
      information  and  content.   They  are declared in the
      configuration file as:


          Xname {, field=value}*

      where name is the name of the filter (used  internally
      only)  and the "field=name" pairs define attributes of
      the filter.  Also see the documentation for the Input-
      MailFilters option for more information.

           Fields are:


          Socket    The socket specification
          Flags     Special flags for this filter
          Timeouts  Timeouts for this filter

      Only  the first character of the field name is checked
      (it's case-sensitive).

           The socket specification is one of the  following
      forms:


          S=inet: port @ host



          S=inet6: port @ host












Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-151


          S=local: path

      The  first two describe an IPv4 or IPv6 socket listen-
      ing on a certain port at a given host or  IP  address.
      The  final  form  describes  a  named  socket  on  the
      filesystem at the given path.

           The following flags may  be  set  in  the  filter
      description.

      R   Reject connection if filter unavailable.

      T   Temporary fail connection if filter unavailable.

           If  neither F=R nor F=T is specified, the message
      is passed through sendmail in case of filter errors as
      if the failing filters were not present.

           The  timeouts  can  be  set using the four fields
      inside of the T= equate:

      C   Timeout for connecting to a filter.  If set to  0,
          the system's connect() timeout will be used.

      S   Timeout  for sending information from the MTA to a
          filter.

      R   Timeout for reading reply from the filter.

      E   Overall timeout between sending end-of-message  to
          filter and waiting for the final acknowledgment.

           Note  the separator between each timeout field is
      a  ';'.   The  default  values  (if  not   set)   are:
      T=C:5m;S:10s;R:10s;E:5m  where  s  is seconds and m is
      minutes.

           Examples:


          Xfilter1, S=local:/var/run/f1.sock, F=R
          Xfilter2, S=inet6:999@localhost, F=T, T=S:1s;R:1s;E:5m
          Xfilter3, S=inet:3333@localhost, T=C:2m


   5.12.  The User Database

           The user  database  is  deprecated  in  favor  of
      ``virtusertable''  and  ``genericstable'' as explained
      in the file cf/README.  If you have a version of send-
      mail  with  the user database package compiled in, the
      handling of sender and recipient  addresses  is  modi-
      fied.










SMM:08-152         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


           The  location of this database is controlled with
      the UserDatabaseSpec option.

      5.12.1.  Structure of the user database

              The database is a sorted (BTree-based)  struc-
         ture.  User records are stored with the key:


             user-name:field-name

         The   sorted  database  format  ensures  that  user
         records are clustered  together.   Meta-information
         is always stored with a leading colon.

              Field  names define both the syntax and seman-
         tics of the value.  Defined fields include:

         maildrop  The  delivery  address  for  this   user.
                   There  may  be  multiple  values  of this
                   record.   In  particular,  mailing  lists
                   will  have  one  maildrop record for each
                   user on the list.

         mailname  The outgoing mailname for this user.  For
                   each  outgoing  name,  there should be an
                   appropriate maildrop record for that name
                   to   allow   return   mail.    See   also
                   :default:mailname.

         mailsender
                   Changes any mail sent to this address  to
                   have the indicated envelope sender.  This
                   is intended for mailing lists,  and  will
                   normally  be  the  name of an appropriate
                   -request address.  It is very similar  to
                   the owner-list syntax in the alias file.

         fullname  The full name of the user.

         office-address
                   The office address for this user.

         office-phone
                   The office phone number for this user.

         office-fax
                   The office FAX number for this user.

         home-address
                   The home address for this user.












Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-153


         home-phone
                   The home phone number for this user.

         home-fax  The home FAX number for this user.

         project   A (short) description of the project this
                   person is affiliated with.  In  the  Uni-
                   versity  this  is  often just the name of
                   their graduate advisor.

         plan      A pointer  to  a  file  from  which  plan
                   information can be gathered.

              As of this writing, only a few of these fields
         are actually being used by sendmail:  maildrop  and
         mailname.   A  finger  program  that uses the other
         fields is planned.

      5.12.2.  User database semantics

              When the rewriting rules submit an address  to
         the  local  mailer, the user name is passed through
         the alias file.  If no alias is found  (or  if  the
         alias  points  back  to the same address), the name
         (with ":maildrop" appended) is then used as  a  key
         in  the  user  database.  If no match occurs (or if
         the maildrop points at the same address),  forward-
         ing is tried.

              If  the  first token of the user name returned
         by ruleset 0 is an  "@"  sign,  the  user  database
         lookup  is  skipped.   The  intent is that the user
         database will act as a set of defaults for a  clus-
         ter  (in  our case, the Computer Science Division);
         mail sent to a specific machine should ignore these
         defaults.

              When  mail  is  sent,  the name of the sending
         user is looked up in the database.   If  that  user
         has  a  "mailname" record, the value of that record
         is used as their outgoing  name.   For  example,  I
         might have a record:


             eric:mailnameEric.Allman@CS.Berkeley.EDU

         This  would  cause  my  outgoing mail to be sent as
         Eric.Allman.

              If a "maildrop" is found for the user, but  no
         corresponding  "mailname" record exists, the record
         ":default:mailname" is consulted.  If present, this
         is  the  name of a host to override the local host.










SMM:08-154         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


         For example,  in  our  case  we  would  set  it  to
         "CS.Berkeley.EDU".  The effect is that anyone known
         in the database gets their outgoing mail stamped as
         "user@CS.Berkeley.EDU",  but  people  not listed in
         the database use the local hostname.

      5.12.3.  Creating the database[23]

              The  user  database  is built from a text file
         using the makemap utility (in the  distribution  in
         the  makemap  subdirectory).   The  text  file is a
         series of lines corresponding  to  userdb  records;
         each  line has a key and a value separated by white
         space.  The key is always in the  format  described
         above -- for example:


             eric:maildrop

         This  file is normally installed in a system direc-
         tory;   for   example,   it   might    be    called
         /etc/mail/userdb.   To make the database version of
         the map, run the program:


             makemap btree /etc/mail/userdb < /etc/mail/userdb

         Then create a config  file  that  uses  this.   For
         example, using the V8 M4 configuration, include the
         following line in your .mc file:


             define(`confUSERDB_SPEC', /etc/mail/userdb)


6.  OTHER CONFIGURATION

        There are some configuration  changes  that  can  be
   made  by  recompiling  sendmail.   This section describes
   what changes can be made and what has to be  modified  to
   make  them.   In  most  cases  this should be unnecessary
   unless you are porting sendmail to a new environment.




____________________
   [23]These instructions are known to be incomplete.  Other
features  are available which provide similar functionality,
e.g., virtual hosting and mapping  local  addresses  into  a
generic form as explained in cf/README.












Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-155


   6.1.  Parameters in devtools/OS/$oscf

           These parameters are  intended  to  describe  the
      compilation  environment,  not site policy, and should
      normally be defined in the operating system configura-
      tion file.  This section needs a complete rewrite.

      NDBM      If  set,  the new version of the DBM library
                that allows multiple databases will be used.
                If  neither  NDBM  nor NEWDB are set, a much
                less efficient method  of  alias  lookup  is
                used.

      NEWDB     If  set,  use  the new database package from
                Berkeley (from  4.4BSD).   This  package  is
                substantially  faster  than DBM or NDBM.  If
                NEWDB and NDBM are both set,  sendmail  will
                read  DBM  files,  but  will  create and use
                NEWDB files.

      NIS       Include support for NIS.   If  set  together
                with both NEWDB and NDBM, sendmail will cre-
                ate both DBM and NEWDB files if and only  if
                an  alias file includes the substring "/yp/"
                in the name.  This is intended for  compati-
                bility  with  Sun Microsystems' mkalias pro-
                gram used on YP masters.

      NISPLUS   Compile in support for NIS+.

      NETINFO   Compile in support for  NetInfo  (NeXT  sta-
                tions).

      LDAPMAP   Compile  in  support  for LDAP X500 queries.
                Requires libldap and liblber from the  Umich
                LDAP   3.2  or  3.3  release  or  equivalent
                libraries for other LDAP libraries  such  as
                OpenLDAP.

      HESIOD    Compile in support for Hesiod.

      MAP_NSD   Compile in support for IRIX NSD lookups.

      MAP_REGEX Compile  in  support  for regular expression
                matching.

      DNSMAP    Compile in support for DNS  map  lookups  in
                the sendmail.cf file.

      PH_MAP    Compile in support for ph lookups.

      SASL      Compile in support for SASL, a required com-
                ponent for SMTP Authentication support.










SMM:08-156         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


      STARTTLS  Compile in support for STARTTLS.

      EGD       Compile in support for the "Entropy  Gather-
                ing  Daemon"  to  provide better random data
                for TLS.

      TCPWRAPPERS
                Compile in support for TCP Wrappers.

      _PATH_SENDMAILCF
                The pathname of the sendmail.cf file.

      _PATH_SENDMAILPID
                The pathname of the sendmail.pid file.

      SM_CONF_SHM
                Compile in support for  shared  memory,  see
                section about "/var/spool/mqueue".

      MILTER    Compile  in  support for contacting external
                mail filters built with the Milter API.

           There are also several compilation flags to indi-
      cate the environment such as "_AIX3" and "_SCO_unix_".
      See the sendmail/README file for the latest  scoop  on
      these flags.

      6.1.1.  For Future Releases

              sendmail  often  contains compile time options
         For Future Releases (prefix _FFR_) which  might  be
         enabled  in a subsequent version or might simply be
         removed as they turned out not to be really useful.
         These  features  are  usually not documented but if
         they are, then  the  required  (FFR)  compile  time
         options  are  listed  here for rulesets and macros,
         and in cf/README for mc/cf  options.   FFR  compile
         times  options  must  be  enabled when the sendmail
         binary is built from source.   Enabled  FFRs  in  a
         binary can be listed with


             sendmail -d0.13 < /dev/null | grep FFR


   6.2.  Parameters in sendmail/conf.h

           Parameters and compilation options are defined in
      conf.h.  Most of these need not normally  be  tweaked;
      common  parameters  are  all in sendmail.cf.  However,
      the sizes of  certain  primitive  vectors,  etc.,  are
      included  in  this  file.   The  numbers following the
      parameters are their default value.










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-157


           This document is not the best source of  informa-
      tion  for  compilation  flags  in  conf.h -- see send-
      mail/README or sendmail/conf.h itself.

      MAXLINE [2048]
                  The maximum line length of any input line.
                  If  message  lines exceed this length they
                  will still be  processed  correctly;  how-
                  ever,  header  lines,  configuration  file
                  lines, alias lines, etc., must fit  within
                  this limit.

      MAXNAME [256]
                  The  maximum length of any name, such as a
                  host or a user name.

      MAXPV [256] The maximum number of  parameters  to  any
                  mailer.  This limits the number of recipi-
                  ents that may be passed  in  one  transac-
                  tion.  It can be set to any arbitrary num-
                  ber above about 10,  since  sendmail  will
                  break  up  a delivery into smaller batches
                  as needed.  A  higher  number  may  reduce
                  load on your system, however.

      MAXQUEUEGROUPS [50]
                  The maximum number of queue groups.

      MAXATOM [1000]
                  The  maximum number of atoms (tokens) in a
                  single address.  For example, the  address
                  "eric@CS.Berkeley.EDU" is seven atoms.

      MAXMAILERS [25]
                  The  maximum number of mailers that may be
                  defined in the configuration  file.   This
                  value is defined in include/sendmail/send-
                  mail.h.

      MAXRWSETS [200]
                  The maximum number of rewriting sets  that
                  may  be  defined.  The first half of these
                  are  reserved  for  numeric  specification
                  (e.g.,  ``S92''), while the upper half are
                  reserved   for    auto-numbering    (e.g.,
                  ``Sfoo'').   Thus,  with a value of 200 an
                  attempt to use ``S99'' will  succeed,  but
                  ``S100'' will fail.

      MAXPRIORITIES [25]
                  The  maximum  number  of  values  for  the
                  "Precedence:" field that  may  be  defined
                  (using the P line in sendmail.cf).










SMM:08-158         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


      MAXUSERENVIRON [100]
                  The  maximum  number  of items in the user
                  environment that will be passed to  subor-
                  dinate mailers.

      MAXMXHOSTS [100]
                  The  maximum  number of MX records we will
                  accept for any single host.

      MAXMAPSTACK [12]
                  The maximum number of  maps  that  may  be
                  "stacked" in a sequence class map.

      MAXMIMEARGS [20]
                  The  maximum number of arguments in a MIME
                  Content-Type: header; additional arguments
                  will be ignored.

      MAXMIMENESTING [20]
                  The  maximum  depth to which MIME messages
                  may be nested (that is, nested Message  or
                  Multipart  documents;  this does not limit
                  the number of components in a single  Mul-
                  tipart document).

      MAXDAEMONS [10]
                  The  maximum  number  of  sockets sendmail
                  will open  for  accepting  connections  on
                  different ports.

      MAXMACNAMELEN [25]
                  The maximum length of a macro name.

      A  number  of  other compilation options exist.  These
      specify whether or not specific code  should  be  com-
      piled in.  Ones marked with * are 0/1 valued.

      NETINET*    If set, support for Internet protocol net-
                  working is compiled in.  Previous versions
                  of  sendmail  referred  to this as DAEMON;
                  this old usage is now incorrect.  Defaults
                  on;  turn  it  off in the Makefile if your
                  system doesn't support the Internet proto-
                  cols.

      NETINET6*   If  set,  support  for  IPv6 networking is
                  compiled  in.   It  must   be   separately
                  enabled  by  adding DaemonPortOptions set-
                  tings.

      NETISO*     If set, support for ISO protocol  network-
                  ing  is compiled in (it may be appropriate
                  to #define this in the Makefile instead of










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-159


                  conf.h).

      NETUNIX*    If set, support for UNIX domain sockets is
                  compiled in.  This  is  used  for  control
                  socket support.

      LOG         If  set, the syslog routine in use at some
                  sites is used.   This  makes  an  informa-
                  tional  log  record  for each message pro-
                  cessed, and makes a  higher  priority  log
                  record   for   internal   system   errors.
                  STRONGLY RECOMMENDED --  if  you  want  no
                  logging,  turn it off in the configuration
                  file.

      MATCHGECOS* Compile in the code to do  ``fuzzy  match-
                  ing''  on  the GECOS field in /etc/passwd.
                  This also  requires  that  the  MatchGECOS
                  option be turned on.

      NAMED_BIND* Compile in code to use the Berkeley Inter-
                  net Name Domain (BIND) server  to  resolve
                  TCP/IP host names.

      NOTUNIX     If  you  are using a non-UNIX mail format,
                  you can set this flag to turn off  special
                  processing of UNIX-style "From " lines.

      USERDB*     Include  the  experimental  Berkeley  user
                  information database package.  This adds a
                  new  level of local name expansion between
                  aliasing and forwarding.  It also uses the
                  NEWDB  package.  This may change in future
                  releases.

      The following options are normally turned on  in  per-
      operating-system clauses in conf.h.

      IDENTPROTO* Compile  in  the IDENT protocol as defined
                  in RFC 1413.  This  defaults  on  for  all
                  systems  except  Ultrix,  which apparently
                  has the interesting "feature" that when it
                  receives  a  "host unreachable" message it
                  closes all open connections to that  host.
                  Since  some  firewall  gateways  send this
                  error code when you access an unauthorized
                  port  (such as 113, used by IDENT), Ultrix
                  cannot receive email from such hosts.

      SYSTEM5     Set  all  of  the  compilation  parameters
                  appropriate for System V.












SMM:08-160         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


      HASFLOCK*   Use Berkeley-style flock instead of System
                  V lockf to do file locking.   Due  to  the
                  highly  unusual  semantics of locks across
                  forks in lockf, this should always be used
                  if at all possible.

      HASINITGROUPS
                  Set  this  if  your  system  has the init-
                  groups() call (if you have multiple  group
                  support).   This is the default if SYSTEM5
                  is not defined or if you are on HPUX.

      HASUNAME    Set this if you have the  uname(2)  system
                  call  (or  corresponding library routine).
                  Set by default if SYSTEM5 is set.

      HASGETDTABLESIZE
                  Set this if you have the  getdtablesize(2)
                  system call.

      HASWAITPID  Set  this  if  you  have the haswaitpid(2)
                  system call.

      FAST_PID_RECYCLE
                  Set this if your system can possibly reuse
                  the same pid in the same second of time.

      SFS_TYPE    The mechanism that can be used to get file
                  system capacity information.   The  values
                  can  be one of SFS_USTAT (use the ustat(2)
                  syscall), SFS_4ARGS (use the four argument
                  statfs(2)  syscall),  SFS_VFS (use the two
                  argument   statfs(2)   syscall   including
                  <sys/vfs.h>), SFS_MOUNT (use the two argu-
                  ment    statfs(2)    syscall     including
                  <sys/mount.h>),  SFS_STATFS  (use  the two
                  argument   statfs(2)   syscall   including
                  <sys/statfs.h>),  SFS_STATVFS (use the two
                  argument   statfs(2)   syscall   including
                  <sys/statvfs.h>),  or  SFS_NONE (no way to
                  get this information).

      LA_TYPE     The  load  average  type.    Details   are
                  described below.

      The  are  several  built-in ways of computing the load
      average.  Sendmail tries to auto-configure them  based
      on  imperfect guesses; you can select one using the cc
      option -DLA_TYPE=type, where type is:

      LA_INT      The kernel stores the load average in  the
                  kernel  as an array of long integers.  The
                  actual  values  are  scaled  by  a  factor










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-161


                  FSCALE (default 256).

      LA_SHORT    The  kernel stores the load average in the
                  kernel as an array of short integers.  The
                  actual  values  are  scaled  by  a  factor
                  FSCALE (default 256).

      LA_FLOAT    The kernel stores the load average in  the
                  kernel  as  an  array  of double precision
                  floats.

      LA_MACH     Use MACH-style load averages.

      LA_SUBR     Call the getloadavg  routine  to  get  the
                  load average as an array of doubles.

      LA_ZERO     Always  return  zero  as the load average.
                  This is the fallback case.

      If type LA_INT, LA_SHORT, or  LA_FLOAT  is  specified,
      you  may  also need to specify _PATH_UNIX (the path to
      your system binary) and LA_AVENRUN (the  name  of  the
      variable  containing  the  load average in the kernel;
      usually "_avenrun" or "avenrun").

   6.3.  Configuration in sendmail/conf.c

           The following changes can be made in conf.c.

      6.3.1.  Built-in Header Semantics

              Not all header semantics are  defined  in  the
         configuration  file.  Header lines that should only
         be included by certain mailers (as  well  as  other
         more  obscure  semantics)  must be specified in the
         HdrInfo table in conf.c.  This table  contains  the
         header name (which should be in all lower case) and
         a set of header control  flags  (described  below),
         The flags are:

         H_ACHECK    Normally  when the check is made to see
                     if a header line is compatible  with  a
                     mailer,  sendmail  will  not  delete an
                     existing line.  If this  flag  is  set,
                     sendmail   will  delete  even  existing
                     header lines.  That is, if this bit  is
                     set  and  the mailer does not have flag
                     bits  set  that  intersect   with   the
                     required  mailer  flags  in  the header
                     definition in sendmail.cf,  the  header
                     line is always deleted.












SMM:08-162         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


         H_EOH       If  this  header field is set, treat it
                     like a blank line, i.e., it will signal
                     the end of the header and the beginning
                     of the message text.

         H_FORCE     Add  this  header  entry  even  if  one
                     existed  in  the  message before.  If a
                     header entry does  not  have  this  bit
                     set,  sendmail  will  not  add  another
                     header line if a header  line  of  this
                     name  already existed.  This would nor-
                     mally be used to stamp the  message  by
                     everyone who handled it.

         H_TRACE     If  set,  this  is  a timestamp (trace)
                     field.  If the number of  trace  fields
                     in  a  message  exceeds a preset amount
                     the message is returned on the  assump-
                     tion that it has an aliasing loop.

         H_RCPT      If  set,  this field contains recipient
                     addresses.  This is used by the -t flag
                     to  determine who to send to when it is
                     collecting recipients from the message.

         H_FROM      This flag  indicates  that  this  field
                     specifies a sender.  The order of these
                     fields in the HdrInfo  table  specifies
                     sendmail's  preference  for which field
                     to return error messages to.

         H_ERRORSTO  Addresses in this header should receive
                     error messages.

         H_CTE       This   header  is  a  Content-Transfer-
                     Encoding header.

         H_CTYPE     This header is a Content-Type header.

         H_STRIPVAL  Strip the value from  the  header  (for
                     Bcc:).

         Let's look at a sample HdrInfo specification:




















Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-163


             struct hdrinfo                    HdrInfo[] =
             {
                      /* originator fields, most to least significant  */
                 "resent-sender",              H_FROM,
                 "resent-from",                H_FROM,
                 "sender",                     H_FROM,
                 "from",                       H_FROM,
                 "full-name",                  H_ACHECK,
                 "errors-to",                  H_FROM|H_ERRORSTO,
                      /* destination fields */
                 "to",                         H_RCPT,
                 "resent-to",                  H_RCPT,
                 "cc",                         H_RCPT,
                 "bcc",                        H_RCPT|H_STRIPVAL,
                      /* message identification and control */
                 "message",                    H_EOH,
                 "text",                       H_EOH,
                      /* trace fields */
                 "received",                   H_TRACE|H_FORCE,
                      /* miscellaneous fields */
                 "content-transfer-encoding",  H_CTE,
                 "content-type",               H_CTYPE,

                 NULL,                         0,
             };

         This  structure  indicates that the "To:", "Resent-
         To:",  and  "Cc:"  fields  all  specify   recipient
         addresses.   Any "Full-Name:" field will be deleted
         unless the required mailer flag (indicated  in  the
         configuration  file)  is specified.  The "Message:"
         and "Text:" fields will terminate the header; these
         are  used  by  random dissenters around the network
         world.  The "Received:" field will always be added,
         and can be used to trace messages.

              There  are  a number of important points here.
         First, header fields are  not  added  automatically
         just  because  they  are  in the HdrInfo structure;
         they must be specified in the configuration file in
         order  to  be  added  to  the  message.  Any header
         fields mentioned in the configuration file but  not
         mentioned  in  the  HdrInfo  structure have default
         processing  performed;  that  is,  they  are  added
         unless  they  were in the message already.  Second,
         the HdrInfo structure only specifies  cliched  pro-
         cessing; certain headers are processed specially by
         ad hoc code regardless of the status  specified  in
         HdrInfo.   For  example,  the "Sender:" and "From:"
         fields are always scanned on ARPANET mail to deter-













SMM:08-164         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


         mine  the  sender[24];  this is used to perform the
         "return  to  sender"  function.   The  "From:"  and
         "Full-Name:"  fields are used to determine the full
         name of the sender if possible; this is  stored  in
         the macro $x and used in a number of ways.

      6.3.2.  Restricting Use of Email

              If  it is necessary to restrict mail through a
         relay, the checkcompat  routine  can  be  modified.
         This routine is called for every recipient address.
         It returns an exit status indicating the status  of
         the message.  The status EX_OK accepts the address,
         EX_TEMPFAIL queues the message for a later try, and
         other  values  (commonly EX_UNAVAILABLE) reject the
         message.  It is up to checkcompat to print an error
         message  (using usrerr) if the message is rejected.
         For example, checkcompat could read:


             int
             checkcompat(to, e)
                 register ADDRESS *to;
                 register ENVELOPE *e;
             {
                 register STAB *s;

                 s = stab("private", ST_MAILER, ST_FIND);
                 if (s != NULL && e->e_from.q_mailer != LocalMailer &&
                     to->q_mailer == s->s_mailer)
                 {
                     usrerr("No private net mail allowed through this machine");
                     return (EX_UNAVAILABLE);
                 }
                 if (MsgSize > 50000 && bitnset(M_LOCALMAILER, to->q_mailer))
                 {
                     usrerr("Message too large for non-local delivery");
                     e->e_flags |= EF_NORETURN;
                     return (EX_UNAVAILABLE);
                 }
                 return (EX_OK);
             }

         This would reject messages greater than 50000 bytes
         unless  they  were local.  The EF_NORETURN flag can
         be set in e->e_flags to suppress the return of  the
         actual  body  of  the  message in the error return.
         The actual use of this routine is highly  dependent
____________________
   [24]Actually, this is no longer true in SMTP; this infor-
mation is contained in the envelope.  The older ARPANET pro-
tocols did not completely distinguish envelope from header.











Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-165


         on the implementation, and use should be limited.

      6.3.3.  New Database Map Classes

              New  key maps can be added by creating a class
         initialization  function  and  a  lookup  function.
         These are then added to the routine setupmaps.

              The initialization function is called as


             xxx_map_init(MAP *map, char *args)

         The map is an internal data structure.  The args is
         a pointer to the portion of the configuration  file
         line  following the map class name; flags and file-
         names can be extracted from this  line.   The  ini-
         tialization  function  must  return true if it suc-
         cessfully opened the map, false otherwise.

              The lookup function is called as


             xxx_map_lookup(MAP *map, char buf[], char **av, int *statp)

         The map defines the map internally.   The  buf  has
         the  input  key.   This  may be (and often is) used
         destructively.  The  av  is  a  list  of  arguments
         passed  in from the rewrite line.  The lookup func-
         tion should return a pointer to the new value.   If
         the  map  lookup  fails, *statp should be set to an
         exit status code; in particular, it should  be  set
         to  EX_TEMPFAIL  if  recovery is to be attempted by
         the higher level code.

      6.3.4.  Queueing Function

              The routine shouldqueue is called to decide if
         a  message  should  be  queued or processed immedi-
         ately.  Typically this compares the message  prior-
         ity to the current load average.  The default defi-
         nition is:


             bool
             shouldqueue(pri, ctime)
                 long pri;
                 time_t ctime;
             {
                 if (CurrentLA < QueueLA)
                     return false;
                 return (pri > (QueueFactor / (CurrentLA - QueueLA + 1)));
             }










SMM:08-166         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


         If the current load average (global  variable  Cur-
         rentLA,  which  is  set  before  this  function  is
         called) is less than the low threshold load average
         (option  x,  variable QueueLA), shouldqueue returns
         false immediately (that is, it should  not  queue).
         If  the  current  load  average  exceeds  the  high
         threshold  load   average   (option   X,   variable
         RefuseLA),  shouldqueue  returns  true immediately.
         Otherwise, it computes the function  based  on  the
         message  priority,  the  queue  factor  (option  q,
         global variable QueueFactor), and the  current  and
         threshold load averages.

              An  implementation  wishing to take the actual
         age of the message into account can  also  use  the
         ctime parameter, which is the time that the message
         was first submitted to sendmail.  Note that the pri
         parameter  is  already  weighted  by  the number of
         times the message has  been  tried  (although  this
         tends  to  lower  the  priority of the message with
         time); the expectation is that the ctime  would  be
         used  as an "escape clause" to ensure that messages
         are eventually processed.

      6.3.5.  Refusing Incoming SMTP Connections

              The function refuseconnections returns true if
         incoming  SMTP  connections should be refused.  The
         current implementation is based exclusively on  the
         current  load  average  and the refuse load average
         option (option X, global variable RefuseLA):


             bool
             refuseconnections()
             {
                 return (RefuseLA > 0 && CurrentLA >= RefuseLA);
             }

         A more clever implementation  could  look  at  more
         system resources.

      6.3.6.  Load Average Computation

              The  routine  getla  returns  the current load
         average (as a rounded integer).   The  distribution
         includes  several possible implementations.  If you
         are porting to a new environment you  may  need  to















Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-167


         add some new tweaks.[25]

   6.4.  Configuration in sendmail/daemon.c

           The file sendmail/daemon.c contains a  number  of
      routines  that  are  dependent on the local networking
      environment.  The version supplied  assumes  you  have
      BSD style sockets.

           In  previous  releases,  we  recommended that you
      modify the routine maphostname if you wanted to gener-
      alize  $[  ...  $] lookups.  We now recommend that you
      create a new keyed map instead.

   6.5.  LDAP

           In this section we assume that sendmail has  been
      compiled with support for LDAP.

      6.5.1.  LDAP Recursion

              LDAP  Recursion allows you to add types to the
         search attributes on  an  LDAP  map  specification.
         The syntax is:

         -v ATTRIBUTE[:TYPE[:OBJECTCLASS[|OBJECTCLASS|...]]]


              The new TYPEs are:

         NORMAL    This   attribute   type   specifies   the
                   attribute  to  add to the results string.
                   This is the default.

         DN        Any  matches  for  this   attribute   are
                   expected to have a value of a fully qual-
                   ified distinguished name.  sendmail  will
                   lookup  that  DN and apply the attributes
                   requested to the returned DN record.

         FILTER    Any  matches  for  this   attribute   are
                   expected  to  have  a  value  of  an LDAP
                   search filter.  sendmail will  perform  a
                   lookup  with  the  same parameters as the
                   original search but replaces  the  search
                   filter with the one specified here.

         URL       Any   matches   for  this  attribute  are
                   expected to have a value of an LDAP  URL.
____________________
   [25]If  you  do,  please  send  updates to sendmail@Send-
mail.ORG.











SMM:08-168         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


                   sendmail  will  perform  a lookup of that
                   URL  and  use  the   results   from   the
                   attributes  named in that URL.  Note how-
                   ever that the search is  done  using  the
                   current  LDAP  connection,  regardless of
                   what is specified  as  the  scheme,  LDAP
                   host, and LDAP port in the LDAP URL.

         Any   untyped   attributes  are  considered  NORMAL
         attributes as described above.

              The optional OBJECTCLASS  (|  separated)  list
         contains  the  objectClass  values  for  which that
         attribute applies.   If  the  list  is  given,  the
         attribute  named  will  only  be  used  if the LDAP
         record being returned is a member  of  that  object
         class.   Note  that  if  these  new value attribute
         TYPEs are used in an AliasFile option  setting,  it
         will  need  to be double quoted to prevent sendmail
         from misparsing the colons.

              Note that LDAP recursion attributes  which  do
         not ultimately point to an LDAP record are not con-
         sidered an error.

         6.5.1.1.  Example

                 Since examples usually help  clarify,  here
            is  an  example  which  uses all four of the new
            types:


                O LDAPDefaultSpec=-h ldap.example.com -b dc=example,dc=com

                Kexample ldap
                         -z,
                         -k (&(objectClass=sendmailMTAAliasObject)(sendmailMTAKey=%0))
                         -v sendmailMTAAliasValue,mail:NORMAL:inetOrgPerson,
                            uniqueMember:DN:groupOfUniqueNames,
                            sendmailMTAAliasSearch:FILTER:sendmailMTAAliasObject,
                            sendmailMTAAliasURL:URL:sendmailMTAAliasObject


                 That definition specifies that:

             + Any   value   in   a    sendmailMTAAliasValue
               attribute  will be added to the result string
               regardless of object class.
             + The mail  attribute  will  be  added  to  the
               result  string if the LDAP record is a member
               of the inetOrgPerson object class.
             + The uniqueMember  attribute  is  a  recursive
               attribute,  used  only  in groupOfUniqueNames










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-169


               records, and should contain an LDAP DN point-
               ing  to another LDAP record.  The desire here
               is to return the mail  attribute  from  those
               DNs.
             + The   sendmailMTAAliasSearch   attribute  and
               sendmailMTAAliasURL are  both  used  only  if
               referenced in a sendmailMTAAliasObject.  They
               are both recursive, the first for a new  LDAP
               search string and the latter for an LDAP URL.

   6.6.  STARTTLS

           In  this section we assume that sendmail has been
      compiled  with  support  for  STARTTLS.   To  properly
      understand the use of STARTTLS in sendmail, it is nec-
      essary to understand at least some basics about  X.509
      certificates and public key cryptography.  This infor-
      mation can be found in books about SSL/TLS or  on  WWW
      sites, e.g., "http://www.OpenSSL.org/".

      6.6.1.  Certificates for STARTTLS

              When  acting  as  a  server, sendmail requires
         X.509 certificates to support STARTTLS: one as cer-
         tificate  for the server (ServerCertFile and corre-
         sponding private ServerKeyFile) at least  one  root
         CA  (CACertFile),  i.e., a certificate that is used
         to sign other certificates, and a path to a  direc-
         tory  which contains (zero or more) other CAs (CAC-
         ertPath).  The file specified  via  CACertFile  can
         contain  several  certificates  of CAs.  The DNs of
         these certificates are sent to  the  client  during
         the   TLS   handshake  (as  part  of  the  Certifi-
         cateRequest) as the list of acceptable  CAs.   How-
         ever,  do  not list too many root CAs in that file,
         otherwise the TLS handshake may fail; e.g.,


             error:14094417:SSL routines:SSL3_READ_BYTES:
             sslv3 alert illegal parameter:s3_pkt.c:964:SSL alert number 47

         You should probably put only the CA cert into  that
         file that signed your own cert(s), or at least only
         those you trust.   The  CACertPath  directory  must
         contain  the hashes of each CA certificate as file-
         names (or as links to them).  Symbolic links can be
         generated  with  the  following  two (Bourne) shell
         commands:


             C=FileName_of_CA_Certificate
             ln -s $C `openssl x509 -noout -hash < $C`.0











SMM:08-170         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


         A better way to do this is to use the c_rehash com-
         mand  that  is  part  of  the  OpenSSL distribution
         because  it  handles  subject  hash  collisions  by
         incrementing  the number in the suffix of the file-
         name of the symbolic link, e.g., .0 to .1,  and  so
         on.   An  X.509  certificate  is  also required for
         authentication in client mode  (ClientCertFile  and
         corresponding   private   ClientKeyFile),  however,
         sendmail will always use STARTTLS when offered by a
         server.   The client and server certificates can be
         identical.  Certificates can  be  obtained  from  a
         certificate  authority  or created with the help of
         OpenSSL.  The required format for certificates  and
         private  keys  is  PEM.   To  allow  for  automatic
         startup of sendmail, private  keys  (ServerKeyFile,
         ClientKeyFile)  must  be  stored  unencrypted.  The
         keys are only protected by the permissions  of  the
         file system.  Never make a private key available to
         a third party.

              The  options  ClientCertFile,   ClientKeyFile,
         ServerCertFile, and ServerKeyFile can take a second
         file name, which must be separated from  the  first
         with  a  comma (note: do not use any spaces) to set
         up a second cert/key pair.  This  can  be  used  to
         have certs of different types, e.g., RSA and DSA.

      6.6.2.  PRNG for STARTTLS

              STARTTLS  requires a strong pseudo random num-
         ber generator (PRNG) to operate properly.   Depend-
         ing  on the TLS library you use, it may be required
         to explicitly initialize the PRNG with random data.
         OpenSSL  makes  use of /dev/urandom(4) if available
         (this corresponds  to  the  compile  flag  HASURAN-
         DOMDEV).   On  systems  which  lack this support, a
         random file must be specified  in  the  sendmail.cf
         file  using  the  option  RandFile.  It is strongly
         advised to use the "Entropy Gathering  Daemon"  EGD
         from  Brian Warner on those systems to provide use-
         ful random data.  In this case,  sendmail  must  be
         compiled with the flag EGD, and the RandFile option
         must  point  to  the  EGD   socket.    If   neither
         /dev/urandom(4)  nor EGD are available, you have to
         make sure that useful random data is available  all
         the time in RandFile.  If the file hasn't been mod-
         ified in the last 10 minutes before it is  supposed
         to  be  used  by sendmail the content is considered
         obsolete.  One method for generating this file is:


             openssl rand -out /etc/mail/randfile -rand /path/to/file:...256











Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-171


         See the OpenSSL documentation for more information.
         In  this case, the PRNG for TLS is only seeded with
         other random data if the  DontBlameSendmail  option
         InsufficientEntropy  is  set.   This is most likely
         not sufficient for certain actions,  e.g.,  genera-
         tion of (temporary) keys.

              Please  see the OpenSSL documentation or other
         sources for further information about certificates,
         their creation and their usage, the importance of a
         good PRNG, and other aspects of TLS.

   6.7.  Encoding of STARTTLS and AUTH related Macros

           Macros that contain  STARTTLS  and  AUTH  related
      data  which  comes  from  outside  sources,  e.g., all
      macros containing information from  certificates,  are
      encoded  to  avoid problems with non-printable or spe-
      cial characters.  The latter are '\', '<',  '>',  '(',
      ')',  '"',  '+', and ' '.  All of these characters are
      replaced by their value in hexadecimal with a  leading
      '+'.  For example:


          /C=US/ST=California/O=endmail.org/OU=private/CN=Darth Mail (Cert)/
          Email=darth+cert@endmail.org

      is encoded as:


          /C=US/ST=California/O=endmail.org/OU=private/
          CN=Darth+20Mail+20+28Cert+29/Email=darth+2Bcert@endmail.org

      (line breaks have been inserted for readability).  The
      macros  which  are  subject  to  this   encoding   are
      {cert_subject},      {cert_issuer},      {cn_subject},
      {cn_issuer},   as   well    as    {auth_authen}    and
      {auth_author}.

7.  ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

        I've  worked  on  sendmail  for many years, and many
   employers have been remarkably patient about  letting  me
   work  on a large project that was not part of my official
   job.  This includes time on the  INGRES  Project  at  the
   University of California at Berkeley, at Britton Lee, and
   again on the Mammoth and Titan Projects at Berkeley.

        Much of the second wave of improvements resulting in
   version  8.1  should be credited to Bryan Costales of the
   International Computer Science Institute.  As  he  passed
   me drafts of his book on sendmail I was inspired to start
   working on things again.  Bryan  was  also  available  to










SMM:08-172         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


   bounce ideas off of.

        Gregory Neil Shapiro of Worcester Polytechnic Insti-
   tute has become instrumental in all  phases  of  sendmail
   support  and development, and was largely responsible for
   getting versions 8.8 and 8.9 out the door.

        Many, many people contributed  chunks  of  code  and
   ideas  to  sendmail.  It has proven to be a group network
   effort.  Version 8 in particular  was  a  group  project.
   The  following people and organizations made notable con-
   tributions:

       Claus Assmann
       John Beck, Hewlett-Packard & Sun Microsystems
       Keith Bostic, CSRG, University of California, Berkeley
       Andrew Cheng, Sun Microsystems
       Michael J. Corrigan, University of California, San Diego
       Bryan Costales, International Computer Science Institute & InfoBeat
       Par (Pell) Emanuelsson
       Craig Everhart, Transarc Corporation
       Per Hedeland, Ericsson
       Tom Ivar Helbekkmo, Norwegian School of Economics
       Kari Hurtta, Finnish Meteorological Institute
       Allan E. Johannesen, WPI
       Jonathan Kamens, OpenVision Technologies, Inc.
       Takahiro Kanbe, Fuji Xerox Information Systems Co., Ltd.
       Brian Kantor, University of California, San Diego
       John Kennedy, Cal State University, Chico
       Murray S. Kucherawy, HookUp Communication Corp.
       Bruce Lilly, Sony U.S.
       Karl London
       Motonori Nakamura, Ritsumeikan University & Kyoto University
       John Gardiner Myers, Carnegie Mellon University
       Neil Rickert, Northern Illinois University
       Gregory Neil Shapiro, WPI
       Eric Schnoebelen, Convex Computer Corp.
       Eric Wassenaar, National Institute for Nuclear and High Energy Physics, Amsterdam
       Randall Winchester, University of Maryland
       Christophe Wolfhugel, Pasteur Institute & Herve Schauer Consultants (Paris)
       Exactis.com, Inc.

   I apologize for anyone I have omitted, misspelled, misat-
   tributed,  or otherwise missed.  At this point, I suspect
   that at least a hundred people have contributed code, and
   many  more  have contributed ideas, comments, and encour-
   agement.  I've tried to list them in the RELEASE_NOTES in
   the distribution directory.  I appreciate their contribu-
   tion as well.

        Special thanks are reserved for Michael Corrigan and
   Christophe  Wolfhugel, who besides being wonderful guinea
   pigs and contributors have also consented to be added  to










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-173


   the  ``sendmail@Sendmail.ORG'' list and, by answering the
   bulk of the questions sent to that list, have freed me up
   to do other work.































































                          APPENDIX  A


                      COMMAND LINE FLAGS




     Arguments   must   be   presented   with  flags  before
addresses.  The flags are:

-Ax       Select an alternative .cf  file  which  is  either
          sendmail.cf  for  -Am  or  submit.cf  for -Ac.  By
          default the .cf file is chosen based on the opera-
          tion  mode.   For -bm (default), -bs, and -t it is
          submit.cf if it exists, for all others it is send-
          mail.cf.

-bx       Set operation mode to x.  Operation modes are:


              m   Deliver mail (default)
              s   Speak SMTP on input side
              a*  ``Arpanet'' mode (get envelope sender information from header)
              C   Check the configuration file
              d   Run as a daemon in background
              D   Run as a daemon in foreground
              t   Run in test mode
              v   Just verify addresses, don't collect or deliver
              i   Initialize the alias database
              p   Print the mail queue
              P   Print overview over the mail queue (requires shared memory)
              h   Print the persistent host status database
              H   Purge expired entries from the persistent host status database


-Btype    Indicate body type.

-Cfile    Use a different configuration file.  Sendmail runs
          as the invoking user (rather than root) when  this
          flag is specified.

-D logfile
          Send  debugging  output  to  the indicated logfile
          instead of stdout.

-dlevel   Set debugging level.


____________________
   *Deprecated.




SMM:08-174         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide







Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-175


-f addr   The envelope sender address is set to addr.   This
          address  may  also  be used in the From: header if
          that header is missing during initial  submission.
          The envelope sender address is used as the recipi-
          ent for delivery status notifications and may also
          appear in a Return-Path: header.

-F name   Sets the full name of this user to name.

-G        When  accepting  messages  via  the  command line,
          indicate that they are for relay (gateway) submis-
          sion.   sendmail  may complain about syntactically
          invalid messages, e.g.,  unqualified  host  names,
          rather  than  fixing  them  when this flag is set.
          sendmail will not do any canonicalization in  this
          mode.

-h cnt    Sets  the "hop count" to cnt.  This represents the
          number of times this message has been processed by
          sendmail  (to  the  extent that it is supported by
          the underlying networks).  Cnt is incremented dur-
          ing  processing,  and  if  it reaches MAXHOP (cur-
          rently 25) sendmail throws away the  message  with
          an error.

-L tag    Sets  the  identifier  used for syslog.  Note that
          this identifier is set as early as possible.  How-
          ever,  sendmail  may  be  used  if  problems arise
          before the command line arguments are processed.

-n        Don't do aliasing or forwarding.

-N notifications
          Tag all addresses being sent as wanting the  indi-
          cated  notifications,  which  consists of the word
          "NEVER" or a comma-separated  list  of  "SUCCESS",
          "FAILURE",  and  "DELAY"  for successful delivery,
          failure, and a message that is stuck  in  a  queue
          somewhere.  The default is "FAILURE,DELAY".

-r addr   An obsolete form of -f.

-oxvalue  Set  option  x  to  the  specified  value.   These
          options are described in Section 5.6.

-Ooption=value
          Set option to the specified value (for  long  form
          option  names).   These  options  are described in
          Section 5.6.

-Mxvalue  Set macro x to the specified value.












SMM:08-176         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


-pprotocol
          Set the sending protocol.  Programs are encouraged
          to  set  this.   The  protocol field can be in the
          form protocol:host to set both the sending  proto-
          col and sending host.  For example, "-pUUCP:uunet"
          sets the sending protocol to UUCP and the  sending
          host to uunet.  (Some existing programs use -oM to
          set the r and s  macros;  this  is  equivalent  to
          using -p.)

-qtime    Try to process the queued up mail.  If the time is
          given, a sendmail will start one or more processes
          to  run through the queue(s) at the specified time
          interval to deliver  queued  mail;  otherwise,  it
          only runs once.  Each of these processes acts on a
          workgroup.  These  processes  are  also  known  as
          workgroup  processes  or  WGP's  for  short.  Each
          workgroup is responsible for controlling the  pro-
          cessing  of  one  or  more queues; workgroups help
          manage the use of system  resources  by  sendmail.
          Each  workgroup may have one or more children con-
          currently processing queues depending on the  set-
          ting of MaxQueueChildren.

-qptime   Similar  to  -q  with a time argument, except that
          instead of periodically  starting  WGP's  sendmail
          starts  persistent  WGP's  that  alternate between
          processing queues and sleeping.  The sleep time is
          specified  by  the time argument; it defaults to 1
          second, except that a WGP always sleeps at least 5
          seconds if their queues were empty in the previous
          run.  Persistent processes are managed by a  queue
          control  process  (QCP).   The  QCP  is the parent
          process of the WGP's.  Typically the QCP  will  be
          the sendmail daemon (when started with -bd or -bD)
          or a special process (named Queue  control)  (when
          started  without -bd or -bD).  If a persistent WGP
          ceases to be active for some  reason  another  WGP
          will  be started by the QCP for the same workgroup
          in most cases. When  a  persistent  WGP  has  core
          dumped,  the  debug  flag no_persistent_restart is
          set  or  the  specific  persistent  WGP  has  been
          restarted too many times already then the WGP will
          not be started again and a message will be  logged
          to  this  effect.   To  stop  (SIGTERM) or restart
          (SIGHUP) persistent WGP's the  appropriate  signal
          should  be sent to the QCP. The QCP will propagate
          the signal to all of the WGP's and if  appropriate
          restart the persistent WGP's.

-qGname   Run the jobs in the queue group name once.












Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-177


-q[!]Xstring
          Run  the  queue  once,  limiting the jobs to those
          matching Xstring.  The key letter X can  be  I  to
          limit  based on queue identifier, R to limit based
          on recipient, S to limit based on sender, or Q  to
          limit  based  on quarantine reason for quarantined
          jobs.  A particular queued job is accepted if  one
          of the corresponding attributes contains the indi-
          cated string.  The optional  !  character  negates
          the condition tested.  Multiple -qX flags are per-
          mitted,  with  items  with  the  same  key  letter
          "or'ed"  together,  and  items  with different key
          letters "and'ed" together.

-Q[reason]
          Quarantine a normal queue  items  with  the  given
          reason  or unquarantine quarantined queue items if
          no reason is given.  This should only be used with
          some  sort  of item matching using -q[!]Xstring as
          described above.

-R ret    What information you want returned if the  message
          bounces;  ret  can  be  "HDRS" for headers only or
          "FULL" for headers plus body.  This is  a  request
          only;  the  other end is not required to honor the
          parameter.  If "HDRS" is specified  local  bounces
          also return only the headers.

-t        Read  the  header  for  "To:",  "Cc:",  and "Bcc:"
          lines, and send to everyone listed in those lists.
          The  "Bcc:"  line  will be deleted before sending.
          Any addresses  in  the  argument  vector  will  be
          deleted from the send list.

-V envid  The indicated envid is passed with the envelope of
          the message and returned if the message bounces.

-X logfile
          Log all traffic in and  out  of  sendmail  in  the
          indicated  logfile  for debugging mailer problems.
          This produces a  lot  of  data  very  quickly  and
          should be used sparingly.

     There  are a number of options that may be specified as
primitive flags.  These are the e,  i,  m,  and  v  options.
Also, the f option may be specified as the -s flag.  The DSN
related options "-N", "-R", and  "-V"  have  no  effects  on
sendmail running as daemon.


















                        APPENDIX  B


                     QUEUE FILE FORMATS




     This  appendix describes the format of the queue files.
These files live in a queue directory.  The  individual  qf,
hf, Qf, df, and xf files may be stored in separate qf/, df/,
and xf/ subdirectories if they  are  present  in  the  queue
directory.

     All  queue  files  have  the name ttYMDhmsNNppppp where
YMDhmsNNppppp is the id for this message and  the  tt  is  a
type.  The individual letters in the id are:

Y    Encoded year

M    Encoded month

D    Encoded day

h    Encoded hour

m    Encoded minute

s    Encoded second

NN   Encoded envelope number

ppppp
     At least five decimal digits of the process ID

     All files with the same id collectively define one mes-
sage.  Due to the use  of  memory-buffered  files,  some  of
these files may never appear on disk.

     The types are:

qf   The  queue control file.  This file contains the infor-
     mation necessary to process the job.

hf   The same as a queue control file, but for a quarantined
     queue job.

df   The data file.  The message body (excluding the header)
     is kept in this file.  Sometimes the  df  file  is  not
     stored  in  the  same directory as the qf file; in this
     case, the qf file contains a `d' record which names the
     queue directory that contains the df file.



SMM:08-178         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide







Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-179


tf   A temporary file.  This is an image of the qf file when
     it is being rebuilt.  It should be renamed to a qf file
     very quickly.

xf   A  transcript  file, existing during the life of a ses-
     sion showing everything that happens during  that  ses-
     sion.  Sometimes the xf file must be generated before a
     queue group has been selected; in  this  case,  the  xf
     file will be stored in a directory of the default queue
     group.

Qf   A ``lost'' queue control file.  sendmail renames  a  qf
     file to Qf if there is a severe (configuration) problem
     that  cannot  be  solved  without  human  intervention.
     Search  the logfile for the queue file id to figure out
     what happened.  After you resolved the problem, you can
     rename the Qf file to qf and send it again.

     The  queue  control  file  is structured as a series of
lines each beginning with a code letter.  The lines  are  as
follows:

V    The  version  number  of the queue file format, used to
     allow new sendmail binaries to read queue files created
     by  older versions.  Defaults to version zero.  Must be
     the first line of the file if present.   For  8.12  the
     version number is 6.

A    The  information  given  by  the AUTH= parameter of the
     "MAIL FROM:" command or  $f@$j  if  sendmail  has  been
     called directly.

H    A  header definition.  There may be any number of these
     lines.  The order  is  important:  they  represent  the
     order  in the final message.  These use the same syntax
     as header definitions in the configuration file.

C    The    controlling    address.     The    syntax     is
     "localuser:aliasname".   Recipient  addresses following
     this line will be flagged so that  deliveries  will  be
     run  as the localuser (a user name from the /etc/passwd
     file); aliasname is the name of the alias that expanded
     to this address (used for printing messages).

q    The quarantine reason for quarantined queue items.

Q    The  ``original  recipient'',  specified  by the ORCPT=
     field in an ESMTP transaction.   Used  exclusively  for
     Delivery  Status Notifications.  It applies only to the
     following `R' line.

r    The ``final recipient'' used for Delivery Status  Noti-
     fications.  It applies only to the following `R' line.










SMM:08-180         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


R    A  recipient address.  This will normally be completely
     aliased, but is actually realiased when the job is pro-
     cessed.   There  will  be  one line for each recipient.
     Version 1 qf files also include a leading  colon-termi-
     nated  list of flags, which can be `S' to return a mes-
     sage on successful final delivery, `F' to return a mes-
     sage on failure, `D' to return a message if the message
     is delayed, `B' to indicate that  the  body  should  be
     returned,  `N'  to suppress returning the body, and `P'
     to declare this as a ``primary'' (command line or SMTP-
     session) address.

S    The  sender  address.   There  may only be one of these
     lines.

T    The job creation time.  This is used to compute when to
     time out the job.

P    The  current  message  priority.  This is used to order
     the queue.  Higher numbers mean lower priorities.   The
     priority changes as the message sits in the queue.  The
     initial priority depends on the message class  and  the
     size of the message.

M    A  message.  This line is printed by the mailq command,
     and is generally used to store status information.   It
     can contain any text.

F    Flag bits, represented as one letter per flag.  Defined
     flag bits are r indicating that this is a response mes-
     sage  and  w indicating that a warning message has been
     sent announcing that the mail has been delayed.   Other
     flag  bits  are:  8:  the body contains 8bit data, b: a
     Bcc: header should be removed,  d:  the  mail  has  RET
     parameters  (see  RFC 1894), n: the body of the message
     should not be returned in case  of  an  error,  s:  the
     envelope has been split.

N    The total number of delivery attempts.

K    The time (as seconds since January 1, 1970) of the last
     delivery attempt.

d    If the df file is in a different directory than the  qf
     file,  then  a  `d'  record  is present, specifying the
     directory in which the df file resides.

I    The i-number of the data file;  this  can  be  used  to
     recover your mail queue after a disastrous disk crash.

$    A  macro  definition.  The values of certain macros are
     passed through to the queue run phase.











Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-181


B    The body type.  The remainder of the  line  is  a  text
     string  defining the body type.  If this field is miss-
     ing, the body type is assumed to be "undefined" and  no
     special  processing  is  attempted.   Legal  values are
     "7BIT" and "8BITMIME".

Z    The original envelope id (from the ESMTP  transaction).
     For Deliver Status Notifications only.

     As  an  example,  the following is a queue file sent to
"eric@mammoth.Berkeley.EDU"  and   "bostic@okeeffe.CS.Berke-
ley.EDU"[1]:


    V4
    T711358135
    K904446490
    N0
    P2100941
    $_eric@localhost
    ${daemon_flags}
    Seric
    Ceric:100:1000:sendmail@vangogh.CS.Berkeley.EDU
    RPFD:eric@mammoth.Berkeley.EDU
    RPFD:bostic@okeeffe.CS.Berkeley.EDU
    H?P?Return-path: <^g>
    H??Received: by vangogh.CS.Berkeley.EDU (5.108/2.7) id AAA06703;
        Fri, 17 Jul 1992 00:28:55 -0700
    H??Received: from mail.CS.Berkeley.EDU by vangogh.CS.Berkeley.EDU (5.108/2.7)
        id AAA06698; Fri, 17 Jul 1992 00:28:54 -0700
    H??Received: from [128.32.31.21] by mail.CS.Berkeley.EDU (5.96/2.5)
        id AA22777; Fri, 17 Jul 1992 03:29:14 -0400
    H??Received: by foo.bar.baz.de (5.57/Ultrix3.0-C)
        id AA22757; Fri, 17 Jul 1992 09:31:25 GMT
    H?F?From: eric@foo.bar.baz.de (Eric Allman)
    H?x?Full-name: Eric Allman
    H??Message-id: <9207170931.AA22757@foo.bar.baz.de>
    H??To: sendmail@vangogh.CS.Berkeley.EDU
    H??Subject: this is an example message

This  shows  the person who sent the message, the submission
time (in seconds since January 1, 1970), the message  prior-
ity,  the message class, the recipients, and the headers for
the message.



____________________
   [1]This  example is contrived and probably inaccurate for
your environment.  Glance over it to get  an  idea;  nothing
can replace looking at what your own system generates.















                        APPENDIX  C


                  SUMMARY OF SUPPORT FILES




     This is a summary of the support  files  that  sendmail
creates or generates.  Many of these can be changed by edit-
ing the sendmail.cf file; check there  to  find  the  actual
pathnames.

/usr/sbin/sendmail
          The binary of sendmail.

/usr/bin/newaliases
          A  link  to  /usr/sbin/sendmail;  causes the alias
          database to be rebuilt.  Running this  program  is
          completely  equivalent  to giving sendmail the -bi
          flag.

/usr/bin/mailq
          Prints a listing of the mail queue.  This  program
          is equivalent to using the -bp flag to sendmail.

/etc/mail/sendmail.cf
          The configuration file, in textual form.

/etc/mail/helpfile
          The SMTP help file.

/etc/mail/statistics
          A statistics file; need not be present.

/etc/mail/sendmail.pid
          Created in daemon mode; it contains the process id
          of the current SMTP daemon.  If you  use  this  in
          scripts;  use  ``head  -1''  to get just the first
          line; the second line contains  the  command  line
          used  to  invoke the daemon, and later versions of
          sendmail may add more  information  to  subsequent
          lines.

/etc/mail/aliases
          The textual version of the alias file.

/etc/mail/aliases.db
          The alias file in hash(3) format.

/etc/mail/aliases.{pag,dir}
          The alias file in ndbm(3) format.



SMM:08-182         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide







Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide         SMM:08-183


/var/spool/mqueue
          The  directory in which the mail queue(s) and tem-
          porary files reside.

/var/spool/mqueue/qf*
          Control (queue) files for messages.

/var/spool/mqueue/df*
          Data files.

/var/spool/mqueue/tf*
          Temporary versions of the qf  files,  used  during
          queue file rebuild.

/var/spool/mqueue/xf*
          A transcript of the current session.















































SMM:08-184         Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide



















                 This page intentionally left blank;
          replace it with a blank sheet for double-sided output.












































Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide           SMM:08-3


                          TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.  BASIC INSTALLATION ................................    7
   1.1.  Compiling Sendmail ...........................    7
      1.1.1.  Tweaking the Build Invocation ...........    7
      1.1.2.  Creating a Site Configuration File ......    8
      1.1.3.  Tweaking the Makefile ...................    8
      1.1.4.  Compilation and installation ............    9
   1.2.  Configuration Files ..........................   10
   1.3.  Details of Installation Files ................   12
      1.3.1.  /usr/sbin/sendmail ......................   12
      1.3.2.  /etc/mail/sendmail.cf ...................   12
      1.3.3.  /etc/mail/submit.cf .....................   13
      1.3.4.  /usr/bin/newaliases .....................   13
      1.3.5.  /usr/bin/hoststat .......................   13
      1.3.6.  /usr/bin/purgestat ......................   13
      1.3.7.  /var/spool/mqueue .......................   14
      1.3.8.  /var/spool/clientmqueue .................   14
      1.3.9.  /var/spool/mqueue/.hoststat .............   15
      1.3.10.  /etc/mail/aliases* .....................   15
      1.3.11.  /etc/rc or /etc/init.d/sendmail ........   15
      1.3.12.  /etc/mail/helpfile .....................   16
      1.3.13.  /etc/mail/statistics ...................   16
      1.3.14.  /usr/bin/mailq .........................   16
      1.3.15.  sendmail.pid ...........................   18
      1.3.16.  Map Files ..............................   18
2.  NORMAL OPERATIONS .................................   19
   2.1.  The System Log ...............................   19
      2.1.1.  Format ..................................   19
      2.1.2.  Levels ..................................   21
   2.2.  Dumping State ................................   21
   2.3.  The Mail Queues ..............................   21
      2.3.1.  Queue Groups and Queue Directories ......   22
      2.3.2.  Queue Runs ..............................   23
      2.3.3.  Manual Intervention .....................   23
      2.3.4.  Printing the queue ......................   23
      2.3.5.  Forcing the queue .......................   24
      2.3.6.  Quarantined Queue Items .................   25
   2.4.  Disk Based Connection Information ............   26
   2.5.  The Service Switch ...........................   27
   2.6.  The Alias Database ...........................   28
      2.6.1.  Rebuilding the alias database ...........   30
      2.6.2.  Potential problems ......................   31
      2.6.3.  List owners .............................   31
   2.7.  User Information Database ....................   32
   2.8.  Per-User Forwarding (.forward Files) .........   32
   2.9.  Special Header Lines .........................   33
      2.9.1.  Errors-To: ..............................   33
      2.9.2.  Apparently-To: ..........................   33
      2.9.3.  Precedence ..............................   33
   2.10.  IDENT Protocol Support ......................   33
3.  ARGUMENTS .........................................   35
   3.1.  Queue Interval ...............................   35










SMM:08-4           Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide


   3.2.  Daemon Mode ..................................   35
   3.3.  Forcing the Queue ............................   36
   3.4.  Debugging ....................................   36
   3.5.  Changing the Values of Options ...............   37
   3.6.  Trying a Different Configuration File ........   38
   3.7.  Logging Traffic ..............................   38
   3.8.  Testing Configuration Files ..................   39
   3.9.  Persistent Host Status Information ...........   41
4.  TUNING ............................................   41
   4.1.  Timeouts .....................................   42
      4.1.1.  Queue interval ..........................   42
      4.1.2.  Read timeouts ...........................   42
      4.1.3.  Message timeouts ........................   45
   4.2.  Forking During Queue Runs ....................   46
   4.3.  Queue Priorities .............................   47
   4.4.  Load Limiting ................................   48
   4.5.  Resource Limits ..............................   48
   4.6.   Measures against Denial of Service Attacks
      .................................................   49
   4.7.  Delivery Mode ................................   49
   4.8.  Log Level ....................................   50
   4.9.  File Modes ...................................   51
      4.9.1.  To suid or not to suid?  ................   51
      4.9.2.  Turning off security checks .............   52
   4.10.  Connection Caching ..........................   56
   4.11.  Name Server Access ..........................   56
   4.12.  Moving the Per-User Forward Files ...........   58
   4.13.  Free Space ..................................   59
   4.14.  Maximum Message Size ........................   59
   4.15.  Privacy Flags ...............................   59
   4.16.  Send to Me Too ..............................   59
5.  THE WHOLE SCOOP ON THE CONFIGURATION FILE .........   60
   5.1.  R and S -- Rewriting Rules ...................   60
      5.1.1.  The left hand side ......................   61
      5.1.2.  The right hand side .....................   62
      5.1.3.  Semantics of rewriting rule sets ........   64
      5.1.4.  Ruleset hooks ...........................   65
         5.1.4.1.  check_relay ........................   66
         5.1.4.2.  check_mail .........................   66
         5.1.4.3.  check_rcpt .........................   66
         5.1.4.4.  check_data .........................   66
         5.1.4.5.  check_compat .......................   67
         5.1.4.6.  check_eoh ..........................   67
         5.1.4.7.  check_eom ..........................   68
         5.1.4.8.  check_etrn .........................   68
         5.1.4.9.  check_expn .........................   68
         5.1.4.10.  check_vrfy ........................   68
         5.1.4.11.  trust_auth ........................   69
         5.1.4.12.  tls_client ........................   69
         5.1.4.13.  tls_server ........................   69
         5.1.4.14.  tls_rcpt ..........................   69
         5.1.4.15.  srv_features ......................   70
         5.1.4.16.  try_tls ...........................   71










Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide           SMM:08-5


         5.1.4.17.        tls_srv_features       and
            tls_clt_features
                 ......................................   71
         5.1.4.18.  authinfo ..........................   72
         5.1.4.19.  queuegroup ........................   72
         5.1.4.20.  greet_pause .......................   73
      5.1.5.  IPC mailers .............................   73
   5.2.  D -- Define Macro ............................   74
   5.3.  C and F -- Define Classes ....................   86
   5.4.  M -- Define Mailer ...........................   88
   5.5.  H -- Define Header ...........................   97
   5.6.  O -- Set Option ..............................   98
   5.7.  P -- Precedence Definitions ..................  132
   5.8.  V -- Configuration Version Level .............  132
   5.9.  K -- Key File Declaration ....................  134
   5.10.  Q -- Queue Group Declaration ................  148
   5.11.  X -- Mail Filter (Milter) Definitions .......  150
   5.12.  The User Database ...........................  151
      5.12.1.  Structure of the user database .........  152
      5.12.2.  User database semantics ................  153
      5.12.3.  Creating the database[23] ..............  154
6.  OTHER CONFIGURATION ...............................  154
   6.1.  Parameters in devtools/OS/$oscf ..............  155
      6.1.1.  For Future Releases .....................  156
   6.2.  Parameters in sendmail/conf.h ................  156
   6.3.  Configuration in sendmail/conf.c .............  161
      6.3.1.  Built-in Header Semantics ...............  161
      6.3.2.  Restricting Use of Email ................  164
      6.3.3.  New Database Map Classes ................  165
      6.3.4.  Queueing Function .......................  165
      6.3.5.  Refusing Incoming SMTP Connections ......  166
      6.3.6.  Load Average Computation ................  166
   6.4.  Configuration in sendmail/daemon.c ...........  167
   6.5.  LDAP .........................................  167
      6.5.1.  LDAP Recursion ..........................  167
         6.5.1.1.  Example ............................  168
   6.6.  STARTTLS .....................................  169
      6.6.1.  Certificates for STARTTLS ...............  169
      6.6.2.  PRNG for STARTTLS .......................  170
   6.7.   Encoding  of  STARTTLS  and  AUTH  related
      Macros ..........................................  171
7.  ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS ..................................  171
Appendix A.  COMMAND LINE FLAGS .......................  174
Appendix B.  QUEUE FILE FORMATS .......................  178
Appendix C.  SUMMARY OF SUPPORT FILES .................  182


















SMM:08-6           Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide



















                 This page intentionally left blank;
          replace it with a blank sheet for double-sided output.








































